Commit graph

2987 commits

Author SHA1 Message Date
Jouni Malinen
fa15d405c7 WPS: Fix WPS IE processing
Commit 17f6b90056 moved the concatenation
of WPS IEs, but did not include the validation that the IE buffer is not
NULL. In addition, the concatenation needs to be done based on the full
IE buffer instead of the parsed pointer that includes only a single
WPS IE.
2011-10-16 17:10:48 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1472d32f72 Remove unused function argument 2011-10-16 14:00:30 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
619e6726ba base64: Stop decoding at the first sequence of pad characters
The base64 encoded data cannot included pad characters in the middle, so
we can stop the loop at the first sequence of pad characters. If the
sequence includes more than two pad characters, the encoding is invalid
and we can indicate failure.
2011-10-16 12:36:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c3b75919fa Fix double free with CONFIG_WPS_STRICT=y
Commit 17f6b90056 extended the use of
the concatenated WPS IE outside the CONFIG_WPS_STRICT block, but
forgot to remove the old wpabuf_free(wps) call.
2011-10-16 12:11:00 +03:00
Luciano Coelho
bd525934e5 nl80211: Add support for sched_scan filtering
Use the SSID filter list passed in the scheduled scan request down to
the kernel driver, so it can use the list to return only the wanted
SSIDs. Some kernel drivers can use this information to offload the
SSID filter to the hardware, helping with reducing the power
consumption.

Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-10-15 18:53:14 +03:00
Luciano Coelho
b59e6f267b Add filter support to scheduled scans
Pass SSIDs to be matched in scheduled scan results. Only the SSIDs
that are included in the match lists will be reported by the driver,
so the filtering can be offloaded to the hardware and the power
consumption can be reduced.

Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-10-15 18:53:14 +03:00
Luciano Coelho
35b741fdf7 Increase maximum number of SSIDs per scan
With scheduled scan support, we may need to pass more than 10 SSIDs in
a single scan request. Some drivers (e.g., wl12xx) support up to 16
SSIDs at once.

Change WPAS_MAX_SCAN_SSIDS from 10 to 16.

Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-10-15 18:53:13 +03:00
Luciano Coelho
d21c63b925 nl80211: Add scheduled scan support
This commit adds scheduled scan support in the nl80211 driver.

Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-10-15 18:53:13 +03:00
Luciano Coelho
cbdf3507e9 Add scheduled scan driver operations
In new Linux kernel versions (>=3.0), nl80211 adds scheduled scan
capability. In order to use this feature to its full extent, we need
to support it in the wpa_supplicant core, so that it can also be used
by other drivers.

This commit adds initial scheduled scan support operations and events.

Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-10-15 18:53:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1e1a0a4dc9 edit: Fix history prev/next selection
Commit 19ec1f262e tried to fix some
cases for history prev selection, but it broke others. Fix this
properly by using a separate entry for the current edit line that
is not yet in history buffer.
2011-10-15 14:03:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
44dc872ee5 nl80211: Add debug print for channel changes 2011-10-15 13:29:56 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
dcd1eb5be5 Fix some forgotten comments in set_beacon to set_ap change 2011-10-15 13:15:24 +03:00
Jithu Jance
6758b1677a nl80211: Use shorter monitor interface name for P2P GO
Currently the P2P Interface name[p2p-%s-%d] is reset when the P2P
Interface name reaches the "IFNAMSIZ" limit. Monitor interface name is
derived from p2p interface name with the addition of few characters
[mon.p2p-%s-%d] and hence Monitor interface name hits IFNAMSIZ limit
before P2P Interface name. Rename the monitor interface name to
mon-%s-%d to reduce the length to same with p2p-%s-%d.
2011-10-15 13:07:30 +03:00
Yogesh Ashok Powar
8666585b9e Disconnect STA when it fails to get added in kernel driver/firmware
Data path for stations that get successfully associated to the
hostapd but fail to get added in the driver/firmware, will not
work. In such cases, hostapd should deauth and disconnect such
stations. In such scenario, hostapd should disconnect the STAs.

Sample output with following patch
wlan0: STA 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59 IEEE 802.11: authenticated
wlan0: STA 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59 IEEE 802.11: associated (aid 1)
wlan0: AP-STA-CONNECTED 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59
wlan0: STA 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59 IEEE 802.11: Could not add STA to kernel driver
wlan0: STA 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59 IEEE 802.11: deauthenticated due to local deauth request

Signed-off-by: Yogesh Ashok Powar <yogeshp@marvell.com>
Signed-off-by: Nishant Sarmukadam <nishants@marvell.com>
2011-10-15 12:41:28 +03:00
B. J
5dd80dd661 Fix NT-hash password use with integrated authentication server
The password_hash parameter was not copied in case of the integrated
authentication server (but was for RADIUS server). This broke EAP
authentication when the user entry used NT-hash.
2011-10-15 12:13:27 +03:00
Janusz Dziedzic
f1afcb391e P2P: Fix wpabuf reuse on p2p_group_notif_noa()
This currently unused function would have triggered wpabuf overflows
due to incorrect variable being reset to zero in the case the old
NoA wpabuf was large enough for the new data.
2011-10-13 01:06:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fd8e4fda50 EAPOL auth: Disconnect after IEEE 802.1X failure
The EAPOL authenticator was previously forcing disconnection in the WPS
use case. However, this can be benefitial operation with any IEEE 802.1X
authentication mechanism and need not be limited to WPS. This helps some
use cases like EAP-FAST where provisioning may require two
authentication runs if the authentication server does not allow the PAC
provisioning step to be used for normal data connection. While the
station would be free to decide to re-associate in such a case, not all
stations do and as such, it helps if the AP does that instead of leaving
the association up with EAPOL state machine in HELD state for 60
seconds.
2011-10-12 20:07:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
88dc899a1b EAP-FAST: Allow unprotected EAP-Failure in provisioning case
While EAP-FAST uses protected success notification, RFC 5422, Section
3.5 points out a possibility of EAP-Failure being sent out even after
protected success notification in case of provisioning. Change the
EAP-FAST peer implementation to accept that exception to the protected
success notification. This allows the station to re-connect more quickly
to complete EAP-FAST connection in the case the server rejects the
initial attempt by only allowing it to use to provision a new PAC.
2011-10-12 20:05:02 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4458d91554 P2P: Do not change SSID during GO negotiation
If GO Negotiation Request (or in theory, also GO Negotiation Response)
frame is delivered multiple time for processing, the SSID of the group
could end up getting changed. This could result in possible issues if
the peer ended up using different SSID. To avoid this, make sure the
SSID does not get changed unless the negotiation is for a new group.
2011-10-11 18:29:31 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c3fea27274 Clear OKC-based PMKSA caching entries if PMK is changed
Whenever PMK gets changed (e.g., due to re-authentication), all PMKSA
caching entries that were created using the previous PMK needs to be
replaced. Previously, only the entry for the current AP was cleared.
Flush the other entries based on network_ctx matches to get rid of the
OKC entries. These entries can then be re-creating using OKC with the
new PMK.
2011-10-02 19:36:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
15e2c77d03 Sync with wireless-testing.git linux/nl80211.h 2011-10-02 13:16:42 +03:00
Johannes Berg
1473f95e98 AP: Use QoS nullfunc for connection poll
When polling a station that has been inactive for a while, hostapd currently
always uses a null data frame. This is a bit strange with uAPSD clients
(though it seems to mostly work) since the EOSP bit can never be set in a
non-QoS frame. Make hostapd use QoS null data frames for probing when the
station is a QoS STA.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-10-01 21:04:11 +03:00
Marek Kwaczynski
ed908a55da P2P: Refresh peer entries on Probe Request RX
Do not expire P2P peer entries if Probe Request frames are received from
them.
2011-10-01 20:40:14 +03:00
Zhi Chen
56aa082a1d WPS: Send AP Settings as a wrapped Credential attribute to ctrl_iface
Wrap self-generated WPS credential for new AP settings and send that to
control interface to provide the needed information in
WPS-NEW-AP-SETTINGS for external processing.
2011-09-30 22:26:37 +03:00
Shan Palanisamy
a52eba0f44 FT: Add driver wrappers for FT with driver-based MLME/SME 2011-09-30 00:05:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0c840c33f7 Move GAS/ANQP build routines to a separate file from P2P
GAS/ANQP is a generic protocol and in no way specific to P2P, so move
routines used to build GAS/ANQP frames to a separate file that can be
shared for other uses than just P2P service discovery.
2011-09-29 22:18:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
206e1f422f P2P: Provide mechanism for figuring out p2p_scan_ie() buffer need
The new function, p2p_scan_ie_buf_len(), can be used to figure out
how large a buffer needs to be allocated for p2p_scan_ie() use. This
makes it easier to add new data into the buffer without forcing all
callers to be updated to use a larger buffer.
2011-09-29 22:18:23 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fc6997b345 P2P: Fix group formation after previous commit
p2p_in_progress() have to ignore P2P_PROVISIONING state to allow
station mode (which includes P2P client) scan to work.
2011-09-29 21:48:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
303f60d39b P2P: Do not request station mode scans during P2P operations
The P2P search mechanism depends on the same scan functionality that
is used for station mode scans. If these operations are being used
at the same time, scan result processing is not handled properly.
Avoid unexpected behavior by delaying station mode scan requests
if a P2P operation is in progress.

Among other things, this allows the station mode connection attempt
to be continued after a P2P find or group formation has been completed
if the interface is available (i.e., when the P2P group uses a
separate virtual interface).
2011-09-29 16:53:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0c96fd6d03 P2P: Do not leave P2P scan handler registered if scan fails
If the initial attempt to start a scan for p2p_find fails, an error
is reported. However, the P2P scan handler and search state was
left behind. That can result in unexpected behavior when the next
non-P2P scan results are indicated. Avoid this by clearing the
P2P search state on failure.
2011-09-29 16:52:23 +03:00
Vivek Natarajan
004ba773ce nl80211: Add driver flag for firmware-based BSS selection
This new flag can be used to change wpa_supplicant behavior in the
default ap_scan=1 mode to move BSS selection into the driver (likely
firmware). This commit is only adding the flag; separate commits
will be used to change the actual connection/roaming behavior.
2011-09-26 14:26:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
daa30c23aa Rename and fix ANQP definitions to match IEEE Std 802.11u-2011 2011-09-26 11:51:58 +03:00
Mathieu Olivari
8a8c1c0ea5 atheros: Allow flattened driver include file directories
Remove the full driver path to the driver header file to make it
easier to use common include directory for all driver headers.
2011-09-26 11:49:22 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fd2f2d0489 Remove EAP-TTLSv1 and TLS/IA
These protocols seem to be abandoned: latest IETF drafts have expired
years ago and it does not seem likely that EAP-TTLSv1 would be
deployed. The implementation in hostapd/wpa_supplicant was not complete
and not fully tested. In addition, the TLS/IA functionality was only
available when GnuTLS was used. Since GnuTLS removed this functionality
in 3.0.0, there is no available TLS/IA implementation in the latest
version of any supported TLS library.

Remove the EAP-TTLSv1 and TLS/IA implementation to clean up unwanted
complexity from hostapd and wpa_supplicant. In addition, this removes
any potential use of the GnuTLS extra library.
2011-09-25 21:28:32 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e655e1f512 GnuTLS: Fix build bit various GnuTLS versions
This fixes some build issues in GnuTLS wrapper to be compatible with
at least following GnuTLS versions: 2.2.5, 2.4.3, 2.6.6, 2.8.6,
2.10.5, 2.12.11, 3.0.3.
2011-09-25 19:32:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5c47af9a7a TLS: Add support for TLS v1.1 (RFC 4346) with internal TLS
This is disabled by defautl and can be enabled with CONFIG_TLSV11=y
build configuration parameter.
2011-09-25 17:24:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3bff59f857 TLS: Do not enforce in-place processing in tlsv1_record_send()
In preparation for record layer format changes, modify
tlsv1_record_send() to use separate buffers for payload
and the output message.
2011-09-25 17:11:52 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
85b7187ffc TLS: Add protection against record layer CBC attacks
Instead of using separate bad_record_mac and decryption_failed alerts,
use only bad_record_mac alert regardless of how the CBC decryption
failed. This provides less information to attackers that could modify
packets. In addition, instead of returning immediately on error, run
through the MAC check to make timing attacks more difficult.
2011-09-25 16:57:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
26296a8a7c TLS: Avoid unnecessary copying of encrypted data at record layer
When the received data will be decrypted, there is no need to first
copy it and then handle decryption in-place when decryption step can
take care of both operations.
2011-09-25 16:52:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
61f1ed911d TLS: Fix record layer protocol version validation
TLS v1.0 and v1.1 RFCs were not exactly clear on the use of the
protocol version in record later. As such, accept any {03,xx} value
to remain compatible with existing implementations and new protocol
versions.
2011-09-25 16:48:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
54b8f99454 P2P: Fix a race condition in some P2P command sequencies
The p2p->drv_in_listen variable is used to track Listen state operations
in the driver. This is cleared when the driver reports that the Listen
state has ended (p2p_listen_end() gets called). However, it is possible
that the driver does not indicate that if the Listen state is canceled.
This can apparently happen in some cases where p2p_connect command is
issues while the Listen state is in progress.

Work around this issue by clearing p2p->drv_in_listen when Listen state
is stopped as part of p2p_stop operation. This allows the P2P module to
process CONNECT_LISTEN timeout in p2p_timeout_connect_listen() to move
to CONNECT state, e.g., when starting GO Negotiation after Device
Discoverability mechanism.
2011-09-22 22:49:21 +03:00
Subrat Dash
6a5200e699 atheros: Fix WEXT SIOCGIWESSID use with WE-21 and newer
The "too long" buffer (32+1 octets) prevented AP from starting up with
32 octet SSID with WE-21 and newer. Fix this by reducing the
SIOCGIWESSID buffer length.
2011-09-22 15:42:03 +03:00
Pavel Roskin
ffbf1eaa26 Fix typos found by codespell
Signed-off-by: Pavel Roskin <proski@gnu.org>
2011-09-22 00:43:59 +03:00
Pavel Roskin
a776b19cda wext: Remove write-only variable ap_num
Signed-off-by: Pavel Roskin <proski@gnu.org>
2011-09-22 00:41:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c36d52427a nl80211: Support PMKSA candidate events
This adds support for RSN pre-authentication with nl80211 interface and
drivers that handle roaming internally (i.e., wpa_supplicant is not
responsible for requesting scan results that provide the needed
information without these events).
2011-09-21 16:14:41 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c8c71b395c Sync with wireless-testing.git linux/nl80211.h 2011-09-21 16:14:00 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
20f5a4c24c nl80211: Work around EALREADY from connect command
cfg80211 does not currently allow NL80211_CMD_CONNECT when there
is already an association. This can result in wpa_supplicant being
unable to request a connection if the interface is already in
connected state. Work around this by requesting disconnection if
the connect command fails with EALREADY error. This allows
wpa_supplicant to recover from the unexpected state and complete
the connect request on next attempt.
2011-09-18 21:26:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1b414f59fc eapol_test: Add option for writing server certificate chain to a file
eapol_test command line argument -o<file> can now be used to request
the received server certificate chain to be written to the specified
file. The certificates will be written in PEM format. [Bug 391]
2011-09-17 22:42:54 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8a55f56453 RSN: Add a debug message when considing addition of OKC entry 2011-09-16 18:45:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a8b8379adf Sync with wireless-testing.git linux/nl80211.h 2011-09-16 17:13:08 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
633d4469e8 Fix AP build without CONFIG_WPS=y
Make the WPS processing of (Re)Association Request frame IEs conditional
on WPS support. This fixes a build issue with wps_is_20() not being
defined and makes the non-WPS build a bit smaller.
2011-09-12 22:23:45 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
531e420dd7 Remove time.h include from utils/includes.h
os_*() wrappers should be used instead of functions from time.h.
Removing the header from includes.h enforces this. os_unix.c can
include this its uses are valid wrapper calls. wps_upnp.c uses
gmtime() for which there is no os_*() wrapper available yet, so
allow it to use time.h, too. Similarly, allow dump_state.c to
use time.h for ctime().
2011-09-12 22:19:26 +03:00
Per Ekman
3d9e2e6615 Remove references to time_t/time()
Use os_time() in AP mode instead of direct time() calls.
2011-09-12 22:14:30 +03:00
Johannes Berg
531f0331a1 nl80211: Cancel not yet started r-o-c
Currently, the following can happen:

1) P2P state machine requests R-O-C
2) user changes their mind and aborts
3) P2P state machine aborts R-O-C
4) driver_nl80211 rejects abort since there
   was no notification about the start yet
5) R-O-C period start notification from kernel
6) P2P state machine requests new R-O-C
7) this overlaps with old R-O-C -- iwlwifi driver
   can't handle that and returns -EBUSY
8) state machine stops dead in its tracks

The reason is that the abort isn't going through properly. Instead of
tracking whether a R-O-C is active in driver_nl80211, track whether one
was requested to avoid this scenario.

Reported-by: Reinette Chatre <reinette.chatre@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-09-10 22:57:41 +03:00
Rajkumar Manoharan
47185fc788 P2P: Remove CCK supported rates when running P2P scan
This allows drivers to disable CCK rates from Probe Request frames.
For nl80211, this is currently applying only to the supported rates
element(s), but this mechanism could be extended to address TX rate
control masking, too, to lessen need for global rate disabling.

Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-09-10 22:40:30 +03:00
Johannes Berg
7626850dd6 nl80211: Automatically use concurrent P2P if possible
Since the kernel can now advertise P2P concurrent support by advertising
interface combinations, we can take advantage of that and automatically
use P2P_CONCURRENT / P2P_MGMT_AND_NON_P2P for drivers that advertise
support.

Keep driver_param=use_p2p_group_interface=1 for anyone not advertising
interface combinations in their drivers yet.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-09-10 21:52:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
25e5d5bc08 P2P: Allow advertisement config methods to be limited
The default config methods was hardcoded to claim support for
PushButton, Display, and Keypad. While these are supported by
most P2P devices, there may be some cases where it is convenient
to be able to disable a specific config method. Use config_methods
configuration parameter to set the default values for Config Methods
in the P2P Device Info attribute.
2011-09-08 16:48:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
07fecd3915 P2P: Remove Label config method
The P2P specification (3.1.4.3) disallows use of the Label configuration
method between two P2P devices. This was previously enforced at upper
level, but the obsolete code can be removed from wpa_supplicant. This
adds a bit more strict enforcement of the policy, but should not result
in practical differences since no known P2P implementation uses Label
config method.
2011-09-08 16:40:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d8a790b922 Flush PMKSA cache entries and invalidate EAP state on network changes
If a network configuration block is removed or modified, flush
all PMKSA cache entries that were created using that network
configuration. Similarly, invalidate EAP state (fast re-auth).

The special case for OKC on wpa_supplicant reconfiguration
(network_ctx pointer change) is now addressed as part of the
PMKSA cache flushing, so it does not need a separate mechanism
for clearing the network_ctx values in the PMKSA cache.
2011-09-07 17:46:00 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
734baae0af Clear driver PMKSA cache entry on PMKSA cache expiration
If the driver maintains its own copy of the PMKSA cache, we need to
clear an entry from the driver whenever wpa_supplicant is dropping
an old PMKSA cache entry.
2011-09-07 16:31:09 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
cc28ad8cdf Fix Deauth/Disassoc callback handling with test frames
The Deauth/Disassoc TX status callbacks were ending up kicking the
station entry from kernel driver when test functionality was used to
inject Deauth/Disassoc frames from the AP with the purpose of leaving
the local association in place. Fix this by using STA flags to figure
out whether there was a pending callback for the frame that we need
to act on.

In addition, add forgotten functionality for the Disassoc TX status
callback to match the behavior with Deauth.
2011-09-06 21:03:02 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
64fa840a97 nl80211: Fix WPA_VERSIONS attribute for Connect command
The previous code was trying to figure out which WPA version is
used based on the extra IEs requested for Association Request. That
did not work properly in cases where non-WPA networks are used with
some extra IEs. Fix this by using more robust mechanism for passing
the WPA versions from core wpa_supplicant to the driver_ops
associate().
2011-09-02 20:40:23 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
83180479f0 Android: Modify wireless_copy.h to fix Android build 2011-09-02 16:50:43 +03:00
Bharat Chakravarty
a9355fac5f WPS: Set Probe Request config methods based on configuration
Instead of hardcoding the Config Methods attribute value in Probe
Request frames, set this based on the configured parameter
config_methods to allow correct set of methods to be advertised.
2011-09-01 15:24:45 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ae9c400358 WPS ER: Fix UPnP XML Device Description parser to find correct device
The device description file may include multiple devices. Improve the
simplistic parser by first trying to find the WFADevice:1 device before
fetching the device parameters. While this is still far from complete
XML parsing, this should address the most common root device
specifications.
2011-08-31 13:56:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
86957e6298 nl80211: Support AP mode probe/action frame TX/RX without monitor iface
This allows non-mac80211 drivers to report received Probe Request
frames to user space and Probe Response and Action frames to be sent
from user space when using AP/P2P GO mode.
2011-08-29 14:26:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4dc03726de Delay STA entry removal until Deauth/Disassoc TX status in AP mode
This allows the driver to use PS buffering of Deauthentication and
Disassociation frames when the STA is in power save sleep. The STA
entry (and PTK) will be removed from the kernel only after the
Deauth/Disassoc has been transmitted (e.g., when the STA wakes up).
A hardcoded two second timeout is used to limit the length of this
window should the driver fail to deliver the frame (e.g., the STA
is out of range and does not wake up). The kernel STA entry is
marked unauthorized during the wait to avoid accepting Data
frames from the STA that we have decided to disconnect.

This behavior is available only with drivers that provide TX status
events for Deauth/Disassoc frames (nl80211 at this point). Other
drivers continue to use the previous behavior where the STA entry
is removed immediately.
2011-08-28 23:07:02 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
49a191a142 EAP: Add "expanded" EAP type to get_name functions 2011-08-28 19:23:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
17f6b90056 WPS: Wait for EAPOL-Start unless WPS 2.0 station as workaround
Extend the code that waits for the station to send EAPOL-Start before
initiating EAPOL authenticator operations to cover the case where the
station includes WPS IE in (Re)Association Request frame if that IE
does not include support for WPS 2.0. While this should not really
be needed, this may help with some deployed WPS 1.0 stations that do
not support EAPOL operations correctly and may get confused of the
EAP-Request/Identity packets that would show up twice if EAPOL-Start
is transmitted.
2011-08-28 19:16:59 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fb91db5639 Provide extra IEs for AP mode management frames with set_ap
Drivers that build Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association
Response frames can use this information to and WPS and P2P IE
when needed.
2011-08-26 21:14:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
97a7a0b504 Add support for setting SSID hiding mode through set_ap() 2011-08-26 21:12:47 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b11d1d6439 Add crypto parameters to set_ap() command separately
This helps drivers that build the Beacon and Probe Response frames
internally.
2011-08-26 21:11:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d8cc23a438 Sync with include/linux/nl80211.h in wireless-testing.git 2011-08-26 21:09:08 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9ca47fff8c WPS: Drop responses from ER to a STA that is not in WPS protocol
If an ER tries to send a message to a STA that is not in the middle
of WPS protocol, do not try to deliver that. This can help with issues
where an ER takes long time to reply to M1 and another Registrar has
already completed negotiation.
2011-08-12 11:58:32 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
de6e463f57 Make sure that EAP callbacks are not done if state machine has been removed
It is possible to get a response for a pending EAP callback after the
EAP state machine has already completed its work or has timed out. For
those cases, make sure that the callback function is not delivered since
it could result in NULL pointer dereferences.
2011-08-12 11:56:44 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
167dc97501 WPS: Fix M2/M2D Config Methods to include PushButton even if PBC not in use
The Config Methods attribute in M2 and M2D messages is supposed to
indicate which configuration methods are supported by the Registrar. As
such, it should not depend on whether PBC mode is currently active or
not. That will only affect the Selected Registrar Config Methods and
Device Password ID attributes.
2011-08-11 17:03:57 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
59639fa112 WPS: Fix default virt/phy pushbutton config method setting
Instead of always adding PHY PushButton config method, only add this
if neither virtual nor physical push button is advertised.
2011-08-11 16:51:40 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ccb941e6da Add SSID as a separate item in AP mode Beacon setup
This makes it easier for drivers that need the SSID to get it from the
Beacon setup operation without having to parse the Beacon IEs.
2011-08-10 13:29:32 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
19c3b56685 Replace set_beacon() driver op with set_ap()
This change is a first step in better supporting different driver
architectures for AP mode operations with nl80211. This commit in
itself does not add new functionality, but it makes it easier to add
new AP mode parameters to address needs of drivers that have more of
the MLME/SME in firmware or kernel.
2011-08-10 13:22:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5fb1a23252 nl80211: Fix hostapd build 2011-08-09 23:32:26 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
bdffdc5ddb AP: Reorder WPA/Beacon initialization
Split WPA initialization into two parts so that the Beacon frames can be
configured fully before the initial keys (GTK/IGTK) are configured. This
makes it easier for drivers that depend on the AP security mode being
fully set before the keys are configured.
2011-08-09 14:56:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
bc45d4279f WPS: Do not update Beacon IEs before initial IE set
This avoids a request to the driver to first start beaconing before
the WPA/RSN IE has been generated and then immediately changing the
beacon IEs once the WPA/RSN IE is ready.
2011-08-09 14:40:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f10bfc9adb nl80211: Add l2_packet for AP mode EAPOL TX without monitor iface
This can be used with drivers that do not support monitor interface
when transmitting EAPOL frames in AP mode.
2011-08-09 14:04:53 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9db931ed6d nl80211: Do not include NL80211_ATTR_DURATION in TX frame if zero
When offloading of the offchannel TX wait is not used, it is better to
not include NL80211_ATTR_DURATION to avoid confusing nl80211/cfg80211.
2011-08-09 14:01:31 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a381f2a286 nl80211: Fix connect command to not claim WPA if WPS is used
Such using params->wpa_ie to figure out whether the connection is for
WPA/WPA2 is not correct since that buffer is used also to add WPS IE. In
case of WPS, do not add NL80211_ATTR_WPA_VERSIONS to avoid confusing
drivers.
2011-08-09 13:59:43 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a05225c819 nl80211: Add more debug information on frame TX command failures 2011-08-09 13:59:12 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2e92310217 random: Check fwrite return value to avoid warnings
Some compilers complain about fwrite calls if the return value is
not checked, so check the value even if it does not really make
much of a difference in this particular case.
2011-08-06 21:16:31 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6921f1f386 TLS: Reorder certificates if needed when reading them
The internal TLS implementation assumes that the certificate chain
is ordered by issuer certificate following the certificate that it
signed. Add the certificates to the chain in suitable order when
loading multiple certificates.
2011-08-04 22:39:03 +03:00
Anish Nataraj
628d54639a Dispatch more WPS events through hostapd ctrl_iface 2011-08-04 16:56:41 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
70dbe3b6d7 P2P: Fix 802.11b-only rate validation for Probe Request frames
Commit e1d526293b added code for verifying
whether the receive Probe Request frame was indicating support for only
802.11b rates, but it missed the for loop for the extended supported
rates element. Add that to fix the validation code for cases where
non-802.11b rates are in the extended supported rates element.
2011-08-02 11:18:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
93ac240496 Clarify hostapd error message on unsupported hw_mode value 2011-07-31 00:51:34 +03:00
Pavel Roskin
e783c9b0e5 madwifi: Implement set_freq for hostapd, adjust hostapd.conf
Signed-off-by: Pavel Roskin <proski@gnu.org>
2011-07-29 20:51:55 +03:00
Pavel Roskin
374038fbde hostap: Remove unused variable in handle_frame()
Signed-off-by: Pavel Roskin <proski@gnu.org>
2011-07-29 20:51:55 +03:00
Pavel Roskin
f11634bf5d hostap: Add channel selection support in hostapd
Signed-off-by: Pavel Roskin <proski@gnu.org>
2011-07-29 20:51:50 +03:00
Dmitry Shmidt
a79d5479df Increase maximum number of SSIDs per scan with ProbeReq to 10 2011-07-19 08:55:46 +03:00
Eliad Peller
2f4f73b154 nl80211: Change vif type to P2P_CLI upon P2P authentication
Currently, wpa_driver_nl80211_authenticate() changes the interface type
to station. However, in case of P2P, we need to change the interface
type to P2P_CLI.

Add p2p field to the authentication params, and consider it for choosing
the correct interface type.

Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
2011-07-17 20:25:58 +03:00
Eliad Peller
b1f625e0d8 nl80211: Consider P2P when changing vif type
Commit 9f51b11395 added support for P2P
interfaces when adding a new interface. However, it didn't handle the
case in which the same interface is being used and its type is being
changed. Add support for this case.

Consequently, when doing "ap_scan_as_station" we now need to save the
actual AP interface type (AP/P2P GO) in order to restore it properly.
For that, change ap_scan_as_station type from int to nl80211_iftype, and
set it to NL80211_IFTYPE_UNSPECIFED when not used.

Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
2011-07-17 20:22:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ff6a158b40 nl80211: Do not re-set iftype when initializing added interface
There is no need to force the interface into station mode when
wpa_supplicant adds a new interface (e.g., P2P group) with the correct
iftype.
2011-07-17 20:03:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a1922f934d nl80211: Add more debug info for iftype changes 2011-07-17 19:47:41 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7d9c369827 nl80211: Ignore ifdown event if mode change triggered it
When driver_nl80211.c has to set the netdev down to change iftype, an
RTM_NEWLINK event is generated. Do not generate
EVENT_INTERFACE_DISABLED event based on that.
2011-07-17 13:56:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6554237f38 FT: Share IE parser implementation for Authenticator and Supplicant
These are almost identical, so there is no point in using separate
implementations.
2011-07-16 11:13:39 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c3c828ebfd FT: Fix FT IE parser to not count TIE as protected IE 2011-07-16 11:05:28 +03:00
Hong Wu
c284b46141 FT: Fix the calculation of MIC Control field in FTIE
Reassociation Request/Response frame validation need to count all IEs in
the RIC. In addition, TIE is not protected, so it should not be included
in the count.

Signed-off-by: Hong Wu <hong.wu@dspg.com>
2011-07-16 10:57:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e1d526293b P2P: Do not reply to Probe Request frame indicating only 802.11b rates
Per P2P specification 2.4.1, P2P Device shall shall not respond to
Probe Request frames that indicate support for only 802.11b rates.
2011-07-15 21:49:50 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
97c5b3c45b P2P: Check Device ID match in Probe Request frames in Listen state
Do not reply to Probe Request frames that include a Device ID that
does not match with our own P2P Device Address.
2011-07-15 20:48:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
04a85e4401 P2P: Filter Probe Request frames based on DA and BSSID in Listen state
Only accept Probe Request frames that have a Wildcard BSSID and a
destination address that matches with our P2P Device Address or is the
broadcast address per P2P specification 3.1.2.1.1.
2011-07-15 20:28:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
15f0961447 Check random_get_bytes() result before writing entropy file 2011-07-15 17:17:48 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
40eebf2353 MD5: Fix clearing of temporary stack memory to use correct length
sizeof of the structure instead of the pointer was supposed to be used
here. Fix this to clear the full structure at the end of MD5Final().
2011-07-15 13:42:06 +03:00
Johannes Berg
f67eeb5c32 nl80211: fix interface address assignment
When a new interface is created and already has a separate MAC address
assigned by the kernel, then we need to use that address, not just when
we've created a locally administered address.

This fixes use_p2p_group_interface=1 for iwlagn as it already makes
mac80211 assign an address for a second interface since the hardware has
two addresses assigned.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-07-15 12:05:19 +03:00
Johannes Berg
b14a210ce2 nl80211: Support GTK rekey offload
Add support to wpa_supplicant for device-based GTK rekeying. In order to
support that, pass the KEK, KCK, and replay counter to the driver, and
handle rekey events that update the latter.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-07-12 21:22:51 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7aec3776b9 Sync with linux/nl80211.h from wireless-testing.git 2011-07-12 20:53:32 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
95ab606345 nl80211: Send STA flags to kernel on station addition
Send STA flags to kernel when adding a new station. This ensures
stations are added with up to date flags by kernel drivers.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
2011-07-12 20:28:31 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
d83ab1fe37 hostapd: Set STA flags when adding a new station
When adding a new station, set the STA flags as part of the sta_add()
command. This ensures the flags are up to date when the station is added
by lower level drivers.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
2011-07-12 20:26:52 +03:00
Hong Wu
715ed737dc FT: Disable PMKSA cache for FT-IEEE8021X
wpa_supplicant uses XXKEY instead of PMK to derive PMK-R0 and PMK-R1 for
FT-IEEE8021X key mgmt.

Signed-off-by: Hong Wu <hong.wu@dspg.com>
2011-07-05 20:49:51 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
cb465555d4 Allow PMKSA caching to be disabled on Authenticator
A new hostapd configuration parameter, disable_pmksa_caching=1, can now
be used to disable PMKSA caching on the Authenticator. This forces the
stations to complete EAP authentication on every association when WPA2
is being used.
2011-07-05 17:13:04 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4f525d8e5b Move peer certificate wpa_msg() calls to notify.c
This type of wpa_supplicant specific message construction does not need
to be at the EAP implementation, so better move it up to notify.c.
2011-07-05 12:40:37 +03:00
Michael Chang
ade74830b4 Add dbus signal for information about server certification
In general, this patch attemps to extend commit
00468b4650 with dbus support.

This can be used by dbus client to implement subject match text
entry with preset value probed from server. This preset value, if
user accepts it, is remembered and passed to subject_match config
for any future authentication.

Signed-off-by: Michael Chang <mchang@novell.com>
2011-07-05 12:22:32 +03:00
Yogesh Ashok Powar
a3e685a04b hostapd: Clear keys configured when hostapd reloads configuration
Data path is broken when hostapd reloads its configuration
disabling the security which was previously enabled (WEP/WPA),
using kill -1, as old keys were not cleared.

The patch clears the keys configured when hostapd reloads
its configuration.

Signed-off-by: Yogesh Ashok Powar <yogeshp@marvell.com>
2011-07-05 11:39:26 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
235279e777 TLS: Add support for tls_disable_time_checks=1 in client mode
This phase1 parameter for TLS-based EAP methods was already supported
with GnuTLS and this commit extends that support for OpenSSL and the
internal TLS implementation.
2011-07-05 11:29:42 +03:00
Angie Chinchilla
f5fc603251 P2P: Only call dev_lost() for devices that have been dev_found()
Fix a bug with the current dev_found()/dev_lost() usage. Previously
in p2p_device_free() dev_lost() was invoked for devices that had
not been dev_found(). This caused dbus related msgs to stderr like:
"Attempted to unregister path (path[0] = fi path[1] = w1) which isn't
registered"

Signed-off-by: Angie Chinchilla <angie.v.chinchilla@intel.com>
2011-07-04 20:30:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5f310a9e24 nl80211: Process association/disassociation events in AP mode
This allows non-mac80211 drivers that implement AP mode SME/MLME
in firmware or driver to notify hostapd/wpa_supplicant of AP mode
association events.
2011-07-01 18:44:09 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
866af8b6bd nl80211: Allow AP mode to be started without monitor interface
This is in preparation for supporting AP mode with SME/MLME in the
driver/firmware.
2011-06-28 21:59:44 +03:00
Baruch Siach
567afddb69 atheros: Fix glibc 'invalid pointer' error when WPA_TRACE is enabled
Signed-off-by: Baruch Siach <baruch@tkos.co.il>
2011-06-25 15:41:46 +03:00
Jayant Sane
2463ba70e2 P2P: Update listen and operating channel from P2P D-Bus
Some P2PDevice properties were not updated in p2p->cfg structure:
reg_class, channel, op_reg_class, and op_channel. Hence, update p2p->cfg
parameters through p2p core calls in wpas_p2p_update_config().

Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel.Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Jayant Sane <jayant.sane@intel.com>
2011-06-25 12:08:43 +03:00
Jayant Sane
6402fc438b P2P: Show P2P peer signal level in D-Bus P2P device properties
Move level parameter from p2p_device to p2p_device_info in order to
expose this information and modify D-Bus P2P handler to return this new
parameter through the P2P device properties.

Signed-off-by: Fabien Marotte <fabienx.marotte@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Jayant Sane <jayant.sane@intel.com>
2011-06-23 21:29:10 +03:00
Helmut Schaa
d4744189b7 hostapd: Don't mask out non-symmetric STA HT caps
Previously hostapd just masked the STAs HT caps with its own. However,
some HT caps are not symmetric and as such need to be handled
different.

hostapd shouldn't overwrite the STAs SMPS mode as otherwise the driver
cannot know it has to use RTS/CTS to wake the receiver from dynamic
SMPS for MCS rates > 7.

hostapd shouldn't mask the RX and TX STBC caps with it's own. They are
already handled in a special case below.

Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2011-06-23 20:18:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
56234ee168 Add a copyright and license statement for a radiotap header file
This file is a part of the radiotap parser that Andy Green agreed to
relicense under the BSD license (per email, 11 Aug 2007 07:42:05
+0100). The copyright/license statement was updated in radiotap.c,
but this radiotap_iter.h file was forgotten at that point.
2011-06-23 16:39:26 +03:00
Zhu Yi
c3b0a1c8ad bsd: Fix set_key() sequence number endian issue
In set_key handler, the seq[8] is in little endian order defined by
WPA. BSD kernel uses a u_int64_t value ik_keyrsc to represent it
internally. The kernel expects the native endian order for the value.
Thus, we need to detect the endian order and swap bytes when
necessary.
2011-06-23 15:47:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7cc7307d90 Fix hostapd build without NEED_AP_MLME=y 2011-06-22 21:45:14 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9e2704c3a2 Add EVENT_RX_ACTION handler for hostapd
This fixes an issue with SA Query Response frames not being processed
anymore after wpa_supplicant started registering a handler for those.
This handler registration is in generic driver_nl80211.c code, so
hostapd uses it, too.
2011-06-21 20:55:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
55e632df72 Remove a compiler warning on uninitialized variable
This is not really ever used, but better keep the compiler output
cleaner.
2011-06-21 20:54:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a6efc65ddb nl80211: Add support for driver-based PMKSA cache
Implement PMKSA cache operations add, remove, and flush using nl80211
commands NL80211_CMD_{SET,DEL,FLUSH}_PMKSA to support PMKSA caching
with drivers that select the AP and generate the RSN IE internally.
2011-06-20 10:17:33 +03:00
Jayant Sane
349b213cc8 P2P: Add callback for provision discovery failure
When provision discovery fails, this new callback will be called
so P2P users can react to the failure.

Signed-off-by: Jayant Sane <jayant.sane@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-06-12 14:26:22 -07:00
Jayant Sane
6b56cc2d97 P2P: Retry provision discovery requests in IDLE state
Since the peer may not be in Listen state when the provision discovery
request is sent, try to send the request again number of times when in
IDLE state. This was already done when p2p_find is in progress, but this
commit adds retries to the case where no other P2P operations are in
progress.

Signed-off-by: Jayant Sane <jayant.sane@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-06-12 14:20:39 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6b98a33c86 Fix a compiler warning on WPS-AP-without-UPnP builds 2011-05-31 20:11:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
38e24575c1 random: Add support for maintaining internal entropy store over restarts
This can be used to avoid rejection of first two 4-way handshakes every
time hostapd (or wpa_supplicant in AP/IBSS mode) is restarted. A new
command line parameter, -e, can now be used to specify an entropy file
that will be used to maintain the needed state.
2011-05-31 20:07:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f07ead6af9 nl80211: Re-order functions to group AP/hostapd specific code
Get rid of separate ifdef/endif blocks for AP specific and hostapd
specific code, i.e., only have one main block of code for each case.
2011-05-27 19:02:04 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f7b3920c90 nl80211: Enable more AP callbacks for non-hostapd AP mode
Some of these are required for proper functionality (like
get_seqnum); others may not be needed yet, but including them
allows some extra ifdef/endif blocks to be removed.
2011-05-27 18:54:36 +03:00
Eliad Peller
257da77362 nl80211: Implement set_rate_sets for non-hostapd AP case
.set_rate_sets is not defined for non-hostapd, which prevents
configuring basic_rates when working as P2P GO.

Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
2011-05-27 18:41:46 +03:00
Ken Zhu
41fd1d9e9a atheros: Fix auth_alg configuration for static WEP
When IEEE 802.1X is not enabled, driver_atheros.c needs to know how
to set authentication algorithms for static WEP.
2011-05-20 18:27:53 +03:00
Vinay Adella
86795546f7 WPS UPnP: Fix UPnP initialization for non-bridge case with some drivers
If the driver wrapper is setting up the interface up only at commit(),
UPnP initialization fails. Fix that by moving UPnP setup to happen after
the driver commit() call.
2011-05-19 12:55:47 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fa5165586f WPS: Add a workaround for Windows 7 capability discovery for PBC
Windows 7 uses incorrect way of figuring out AP's WPS capabilities by
acting as a Registrar and using M1 from the AP. The config methods
attribute in that message is supposed to indicate only the configuration
method supported by the AP in Enrollee role, i.e., to add an external
Registrar. For that case, PBC shall not be used and as such, the
PushButton config method is removed from M1 by default. If pbc_in_m1=1
is included in the configuration file, the PushButton config method is
left in M1 (if included in config_methods parameter) to allow Windows 7
to use PBC instead of PIN (e.g., from a label in the AP).
2011-05-17 19:53:02 +03:00
Ben Greear
60eda5e47d Better messages when channel cannot be used in AP mode
Log messages letting user know that the channel cannot
be used because it is flagged unusable.

Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-05-16 22:01:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
46957a9b2d nl80211: Filter out duplicated BSS table entries from scan results
cfg80211 maintains separate BSS table entries for APs if the same
BSSID,SSID pair is seen on multiple channels. wpa_supplicant does
not use frequency as a separate key in the BSS table, so filter out
duplicated entries. Prefer associated BSS entry in such a case in
order to get the correct frequency into the BSS table.
2011-05-16 19:18:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f5a8d42229 nl80211: Fetch assoc_freq from scan table for connect event
When kernel-based SME is used, use the scan table to find a BSS entry
for the associated AP when processing connected event.
2011-05-16 18:35:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b8281964af Add workaround for race condition with AssocResp TX status
It may take some time for the TX status to be delivered for a
(Re)Association Response frame and if any Data frames are received
during that time, they may end up getting dropped as Class 3 frames in
not-associated state. This results in a Disassociation frame being sent
to the station and it assuming that the association has been lost.

Work around the issue by remembering that the (Re)Association Request
has already been accepted and skip the Deauth/Disassoc sending because
of the possible Class 3 frames before the TX status callback is
received.
2011-04-15 19:26:28 +03:00
Yi Zhu
ca79385ab5 bsd: Add support for setting HT values in IFM_MMASK 2011-04-14 22:22:24 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fe655a8402 Add sanity checks for fseek and ftell return values
In theory, these calls could fail, but it is not really likely to
happen in practice in the use case here. Anyway, check that they do
not return an error before accepting the length of the file.
2011-04-14 20:22:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c8d88a145b WPS: Fix off-by-one check in vendor extension parsing 2011-04-14 20:02:31 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
35530d1472 driver_test: Check set_ssid len before trying to hexdump the SSID 2011-04-14 19:52:26 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6e432d3f10 WPS: Use strict validation of (Re)AssocReq only if IEs are known 2011-04-14 02:58:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0bdaa741cd OpenSSL: Use consistent SSL_get_app_data validation in tls_verify_cb
The returned value cannot really be NULL, but better keep this
function consistent on whether the returned value is checked or not.
2011-04-14 02:50:52 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
066608f3ff Avoid theoretical NULL pointer dereference during TLS reassemble
This function does not get called with in_data == NULL in practice, but
it seems to be at least partly prepared for that case, so better make it
consistent by handling the NULL value throughout the function.
2011-04-14 02:45:14 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b211f3eb71 Add sanity checks to EVENT_RX_PROBE_REQ event data
Both the SA and IEs from the received Probe Request frames must be
included and the Probe Request RX callback functions may assume that
these are not NULL.
2011-04-14 02:39:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2a522e7192 Avoid theoretical NULL pointer dereference from debug code
The change to use wpa_dbg() in wpa_sm_parse_own_wpa_ie() could result
in a NULL pointer dereference if the function were called when WPA
state machine has not been initialized. While this cannot really
happen in practice, it is better to be prepared for that since that
was the case before the wpa_dbg() change.
2011-04-14 02:32:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
74727a7b32 Use type cast to get rid of implicit sign extension
The size_t value here can be 64-bit and result in implicit sign
extension. In this particular case, that gets masked out by
host_to_be32(), so there is no practical difference, but it is better
to get rid of the 64-bit variable explicitly.
2011-04-14 01:27:38 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f8b5f7dc6b TNC: Fix TNC_{TNCC,TNCS}_ReportMessageTypes copy type
The supportedTypes parameter is a list of TNC_MessageType values
and the buffer to be copied should use size of TNC_MessageType, not
TNC_MessageTypeList. In practice, these are of same length on most
platforms, so this is not a critical issue, but anyway, the correct
type should be used.
2011-04-13 23:10:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a04bf77209 TDLS: Validate FTIE length before processing it
This avoids reading past the end of the IE buffer should the FTIE
be too short. In addition, one debug hexdump was using uninitialized
pointer to the FTIE buffer, so fixed it to use the pointer from the
parse data.
2011-04-13 22:14:22 +03:00
Yi Zhu
d4a747f006 bsd: Fix buffer size for routing socket with IPv6 disabled
AF_INET6 is not always enabled by default, so use AF_INET instead. In
addition, use the old fixed length, 2048, as a failover value if the
sysctl fails for any reason.
2011-04-12 23:09:14 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
df13a1cdff Fix WPS AP mode regression
Commit 03d3f28a69 broke initialization of
EAPOL authenticator state machines since an error value from
wpa_auth_sta_key_mgmt() (-1) was not handled properly and the fixed
wpa_key_mgmt_wpa_psk() identified the value as a PSK-based AKM because
of all bits being set to 1. The special error value needs to handled
separately to avoid skipping EAPOL state machine initialization.
2011-04-11 19:22:49 +03:00
Adam Kent
4bb3377bc5 Fix #ifdef check for older openssl versions
Small compile fix for older versions of openssl that do not have SHA256
support and hence do not define OPENSSL_NO_SHA256.
2011-04-11 18:37:12 +03:00
Per Ekman
0b04889f0d Remove references to time_t/time()/random()
Replace direct calls in AP mode code with os_*() wrappers.
2011-04-11 18:33:48 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
03d3f28a69 Fix wpa_key_mgmt_*() helper functions to handle multiple bits
These can be used in some cases with a bitfield having multiple
AKMs enabled (e.g., WPA-PSK and WPA-PSK-SHA256). Address those
cases by checking whether any of the matching AKM are included.
2011-04-08 19:11:54 +03:00
Mahesh Palivela
a1ca02927a atheros: Add support for IEEE 802.11w configuration 2011-04-08 12:06:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3f3602386e nl80211: Add support for auth_alg auto-selection with connect command
When the SME is in the driver or cfg80211, the automatic selection
of auth_alg is done by leaving out the NL80211_ATTR_AUTH_TYPE
attribute from the NL80211_CMD_CONNECT command.
2011-04-07 14:53:40 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d332e7083c TDLS: Disable teardown MIC validation workaround
This MIC is required to be correct if the keys are set, so reject
the message if it does not have a valid MIC.
2011-04-07 14:48:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d9040cdb10 Fix a typo in a MIB variable in hostapd ctrl_interface 2011-04-05 01:21:27 +03:00
Felix Fietkau
4378fc14eb nl80211: Send EAPOL frames as QoS data frames for QoS aware clients
This should fix EAPOL reauthentication and rekeying timeout issues
with Intel clients when using WMM (e.g., with IEEE 802.11n). These
stations do not seem to be able to handle EAPOL data frames as
non-QoS Data frames after the initial setup.

This adds STA flags to hapd_send_eapol() driver op to allow
driver_nl80211.c to mark the EAPOL frames as QoS Data frame
when injecting it through the monitor interface.
2011-04-02 22:03:05 +03:00
Paul Stewart
1c5c7273f5 driver: Function to directly poll signal quality
This provides a means for the supplicant to directly request signal
quality metrics from the driver. This is useful, for example for
background scan algorithms that might ask desire this information
out-of-band with CQM events.

Signed-off-by: Paul Stewart <pstew@google.com>
2011-03-31 17:56:48 +03:00
Eliad Peller
72863ea7c6 P2P: add a missing 'return' after building IE from an empty string
When building IE from an empty string and CONFIG_WPS_STRICT is
not defined, redundant 2 bytes are being added to the string.

We have to return right after building the "dummy" string.

Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
2011-03-30 17:08:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e4bf4db907 Work around SNonce updates on EAPOL-Key 1/4 retransmission
Some deployed supplicants update their SNonce for every receive
EAPOL-Key message 1/4 even when these messages happen during the
same 4-way handshake. Furthermore, some of these supplicants fail
to use the first SNonce that they sent and derive an incorrect PTK
using another SNonce that does not match with what the authenticator
is using from the first received message 2/4. This results in
failed 4-way handshake whenever the EAPOL-Key 1/4 retransmission
timeout is reached. The timeout for the first retry is fixed to
100 ms in the IEEE 802.11 standard and that seems to be short
enough to make it difficult for some stations to get the response
out before retransmission.

Work around this issue by increasing the initial EAPOL-Key 1/4
timeout by 1000 ms (i.e., total timeout of 1100 ms) if the station
acknowledges reception of the EAPOL-Key frame. If the driver does
not indicate TX status for EAPOL frames, use longer initial
timeout (1000 ms) unconditionally.
2011-03-29 17:39:12 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2fee890af7 Add driver capa flag for EAPOL TX status and store capa in hostapd 2011-03-29 17:36:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b67d0d9e4b P2P: Store more WPS attributes for peers
Store Manufacturer, Model Name, Model Number, and Serial Number
attributes for P2P peers and expose these through the existing
peer information mechanisms.
2011-03-28 15:27:10 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b6e0180035 P2P: Add more WPS attributes into Listen state Probe Response
Configure more WPS attributes in the P2P module and use them
when generating WSC IE for Probe Response frames in Listen state.
2011-03-28 15:24:12 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b8f64582e3 TDLS: Allow TDLS to be disabled at runtime for testing purposes
Control interface command 'SET tdls_disabled <1/0>' can now be used
to disable/enable TDLS at runtime. This is mainly for testing
purposes.
2011-03-24 20:44:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
21bdbe38be nl80211: Implement deauth for IBSS as leave IBSS command 2011-03-23 21:15:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3c183894d4 Make GKeyDoneStations counting able to recover from mismatches
Previously, a bug in GKeyDoneStations count would remain in effect
until the authenticator is restarted. Make this more robust by
clearing the station count before each rekeying setup. While this
is not really supposed to be needed, there has been bugs in this
area in the past and it is safer to make the implementation recover
from such an issue automatically.
2011-03-23 17:06:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2ade8ef296 Decrement GKeyDoneStations in WPA authenticator when STA is freed
If the STA to be freed is still included in GKeyDoneStations count,
decrement the count when the STA is freed. This does not happen in
AP mode since there is enough time to go through the authenticator
state machine to clear the STA. However, in the current RSN IBSS
implementation, the authenticator state for the STA is freed in a
way that does not allow the state machine to go through the clearing.
To address this, make sure that wpa_free_sta_sm() decrements the
GKeyDoneStations count if the STA happened to be in the process of
GTK rekeying.
2011-03-23 17:00:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ef985058f4 nl80211: Use NL80211_CMD_DEL_STATION event to indicate IBSS peer loss 2011-03-23 15:32:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d47fa330b8 random: Read /dev/random in the background with eloop read socket
This makes it more likely to be able to fetch the 20 octet seed from
/dev/random in cases where other programs may also be competing for
this.
2011-03-22 23:15:00 +02:00
Johannes Berg
c4bb881743 nl80211: Do not add interface to the global list in case of failure
This avoids leaving a freed interface on the global list in case
driver initialization fails.
2011-03-22 15:52:04 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
cd9fc7869a hostapd: Add testing mode for RSN element extensions
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_RSN_TESTING in .config and rsn_testing=1 in
hostapd.conf can now be used to enable a testing mode that adds
extensions to RSN element. This can be used to check whether
station implementations are incompatible with future extensions
to the RSN element.
2011-03-21 13:59:05 +02:00
Sam Leffler
3e1996216e Add support for setting the syslog facility from the config file
This enables setting the syslog facility at build time.
2011-03-20 11:48:42 +02:00
Johannes Berg
c76e5d7f9b wpa_s AP mode: complete only when setup is complete
The AP code might, currently only in the case of HT40, defer actual
enabling to after a scan. In this case, the wpa_s AP code gets confused.
Add a callback for it to use and make it use it to finish only when the
setup has actually completed.

With appropriate hacks in place this allows using HT40 in P2P mode.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-19 13:11:15 +02:00
Jean-Michel Bachot
046ef4aa67 P2P: Add option for requested device type in P2P search/scan
With this, p2p_find can be extended to find certain requested device
types.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-19 12:57:46 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
10c5d2a593 P2P: Use a single define for max number of vendor extensions 2011-03-19 12:22:24 +02:00
Jean-Michel Bachot
6f2c060711 P2P: Keep track of peer WPS vendor extensions
Make the P2P code keep track of WPS vendor extensions received from
peers so they can be exposed via DBus later.

Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-19 12:22:21 +02:00
Jean-Michel Bachot
f95cac271b P2P: Allow adding of WPS vendor extension attributes
This adds the ability to add WPS vendor extension attributes in P2P
frames, like GO Negotiation and Probe Response frames.

Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-19 12:22:18 +02:00
Jean-Michel Bachot
4028a7fd43 WPS: Add support for adding WPS Vendor Extensions
This adds the ability to add WPS vendor extensions to an AP (or GO).
They will be added to the WSC IE(s) in Beacon and Probe Response frames.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-19 12:22:16 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f3cb52fb90 WPS: Move P2P extension generation for WSC IE in Beacon frames
This cleans up debug log by keeping the WSC IE attributes for Beacon
frames before starting to build the Probe Response frame.
2011-03-19 12:22:09 +02:00
Xi Chen
ea244d2156 IBSS RSN: Clear IBSS RSN peers based on peer lost events 2011-03-18 17:04:46 +02:00
Johannes Berg
2f646b6e83 WPS: Store (secondary) device type as binary
Instead of converting back and forth from the string representation,
always use the binary representation internally.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-17 18:50:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f2b3c6bc9c WPS: Add more debug information to PBC session overlap check 2011-03-17 18:04:56 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0439b08d3d WPS: Fix active PBC session removal to ignore MAC address
Use only the UUID-E to remove active PBC session(s) at the completion of
successful PBC protocol run. This fixes potential issues with Enrollees
that use multiple MAC addresses and as such, can get multiple entries in
the PBC session list.
2011-03-17 18:03:20 +02:00
Jean-Michel Bachot
e57ae6e19e P2P: Keep track of secondary device types for peers
Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-17 11:45:46 +02:00
Jean-Michel Bachot
8e8c0df158 P2P: Add Secondary Device Type list in Probe Response frames
Add Secondary Device Type List attribute in WSC IE for P2P
Probe Response frames if one or more secondary device types
are configured.

Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-17 11:16:23 +02:00
Jean-Michel Bachot
a9e86bfb74 WPS: Add secondary device types into Probe Request frames
The secondary device type list is an optional attribute in the WSC IE.

Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-17 11:09:49 +02:00
Johannes Berg
ee7ab173c7 nl80211: Implement deauth/disassoc for non-HOSTAPD case
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-16 16:11:05 +02:00
Helmut Schaa
4f6bd86d07 hostapd: Don't force HT Mixed Mode for non-GF STAs
Currently hostapd will force HT Mixed Mode if at least one non-GF STA is
associated. This will force _all_ HT transmissions to be protected.

802.11n-2009 doesn't require HT Mixed Mode to be used in case of non-GF
STAs but instead the HT information element contains a flag if non-GF
STAs are present. All STAs are required to protect GF transmissions in
that case. Hence, setting HT Mixed mode if non-GF STAs are present is
superfluous.

Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2011-03-16 11:56:39 +02:00
Sujith Manoharan
ec2b890981 HT: Skip ht_capab validation if ieee80211n=0
There is no point in running through the 40 MHz scan if HT is
actually disabled regardless of whether the ht_capab parameter
is set.
2011-03-16 11:22:40 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
c6a3a11048 Check select() return value in wpa_ctrl_request()
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2011-03-15 15:54:21 +02:00
Paul Stewart
cf83fb0b5b wpa_supplicant: Add wpa_supplicant_get_eap_mode method
Signed-off-by: Paul Stewart <pstew@google.com>
2011-03-15 13:53:08 +02:00
Paul Stewart
c83e2e1c45 eapol_supp: Request EAP method from EAP state machine
Signed-off-by: Paul Stewart <pstew@google.com>
2011-03-15 13:49:26 +02:00
Paul Stewart
8813e4d57e eap_peer: Add method to return current method name
If there is an active EAP method, return its name.

Signed-off-by: Paul Stewart <pstew@google.com>
2011-03-15 13:47:33 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e17a2477db nl80211: Extend bridge add/del operations for secondary BSSes
Previously, only the main interface was added to a bridge. Extend this
to apply to all configured BSSes.
2011-03-15 13:02:49 +02:00
Ken Zhu
7099861e4e atheros: Fix default TX key index setting for WEP 2011-03-11 17:55:43 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
61fbd3df04 Fix couple of typos in comments 2011-03-11 12:12:36 +02:00
Chao-Wen Yang
3152ff421e WPS: Indicate PBC session overlap in wps_pbc return value
Use a specific return value, WPS-PBC-OVERLAP, to indicate a reason
for rejecting a wps_pbc command in wpa_supplicant AP mode if the
PBC mode cannot be started due to PBC session overlap having been
detected during monitor time.
2011-03-10 18:59:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3cc002ff97 WPS: Ignore PBC session overlap if a specific Enrollee is selected
This allows the user to complete WPS provisioning using PBC by
selected a specific Enrollee even if there are other Enrollees
in active PBC mode at the same time. The other Enrollees will be
rejected should they try to connect at the same time.
2011-03-10 18:51:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
80e75578c4 WPS: Show the received UUID-E from Probe Request in debug log
This makes it easier to debug PBC session overlap issues.
2011-03-10 18:38:16 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b0dc4155c3 WPS: Use only UUID-E in PBC session overlap detection on Registrar
Ignore possible mismatches in the source address of the frame and only
use UUID-E to check whether a Probe Request or M1 is from the same
Enrollee when figuring out whether there is PBC session overlap. This
is needed to avoid potential issues with Enrollee devices that may have
multiple interfaces indicating active PBC state.
2011-03-10 18:33:53 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b8fb017272 TDLS: Add tdls_testing 0x400 for ignoring AP prohibit TDLS 2011-03-06 14:54:52 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
52c9e6f3f5 TDLS: Do not allow setup to be started if AP prohibits TDLS 2011-03-06 14:54:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
fb12d186b6 TDLS: Add tdls_testing 0x200 for declining TDLS Setup Response 2011-03-06 14:54:47 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
94377fbc52 TDLS: Allow wpa_cli tdls_setup to start renegotiation
If there is already a link the requested peer, request start of
renegotiation instead of completely new link. This seems to be needed
to allow some driver to accept the trigger for a new negotiation.
2011-03-06 14:54:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ad79dba127 TDLS: Add testing mode for disabling TPK expiration
tdls_testing 0x104 can now be used to disable expiration of TPK
(0x100) and to use a short lifetime when initiating link (0x4).
2011-03-06 14:54:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0c4268eb27 TDLS: Add testing code for concurrent initiation
tdls_testing 0x80 can now be used to request wpa_supplicant to send
a TDLS Setup Request frame (i.e., try to initiate TDLS setup)
whenever a TDLS Setup Request frame has been received from a peer.
2011-03-06 14:54:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
43291b683c TDLS: Fix higher/lower MAC address check for concurrent init
The logic here was reversed: the STA with lower MAC address is the
one that continues as the initiator.
2011-03-06 14:54:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a8b2c2d657 TDLS: Tear down old link when receiving TDLS Setup Request 2011-03-06 14:54:34 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2a469a6b56 TDLS: Add tdls_testing flag (bit 6) for testing long TPK lifetime 2011-03-06 14:54:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1c0b2ad1ce TDLS: Use more thorough validation of TPK handshake 2011-03-06 14:54:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f0bfbe2a6c TDLS: Replace os_memset() of all peer data with safer approach
Blindly clearing all struct wpa_tdls_peer members is a risky
operation since it could easily clear pointers to allocated
memory, etc. information that really should not be removed.
Instead of hoping that new code gets added here to restore
the important variables, reverse the approach and only clear
structure members one by one when needed.
2011-03-06 14:54:27 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c61f3e5544 TDLS: Remove unnecessary storing of Link ID IE in peer data 2011-03-06 14:54:24 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3f466ec9e3 TDLS: Fix terminology to match with IEEE 802.11z 2011-03-06 14:54:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a4c3e4b194 TDLS: Move TPK M1 sending to a separate function
Now all there TPK handshake messages are sent in similar functions
and are easier to find from the source code.
2011-03-06 14:54:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2e1d335e44 TDLS: Allow unencrypted network negotiation through wpa_supplicant
This allows the same code path to be used for both protected and
unprotected configurations to limit need for duplicated code in
both the driver and wpa_supplicant.
2011-03-06 14:54:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
9fe6e4b4db TDLS: Clean up and fix Key Lifetime processing
This adds code for validating that the same Key Lifetime is used
throughout TPK handshake and enables TPK lifetime expiration and
renewal/teardown. These part seem to be working, but the actual
handling of TDLS Setup Confirm and renewal are not fully
functional yet.
2011-03-06 14:54:16 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6b192bc346 TDLS: Add new testing modes for TPK lifetime testing
tdls_testing bits:
bit 3 = use short TPK lifetime (301 seconds)
bit 4 = use wrong TPK lifetime in TDLS Setup Response
bit 5 = use wrong TPK lifetime in TDLS Setup Confirm
2011-03-06 14:54:01 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
40cf22e6ff TDLS: Clear peer entries on association/disassociation
Since the TDLS links are allowed only to STAs that are in the same
BSS with us, clear all peer data whenever the BSS may have changed.
2011-03-06 14:53:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5b0e6ece54 TDLS: Add a special testing feature for changing TDLS behavior
These special test cases can be configured at run time with "wpa_cli
tdls_testing <value>" where <value> is an integer (either as a decimal
or as a hex value with 0x prefix) bitmap of special features with
following bits available at this point:
bit 0 = long frame (add dummy subelement to make FTIE very long)
bit 1 = use alternative RSN IE (different RSN capab value and no extra
replay counters)
bit 2 = send incorrect BSSID in Link Identifier of TDLS Setup Request
(e.g., 1 = long FTIE, 2 = different RSN IE, 3 = both of those)

This is disabled by default and can be enabled for the build by
adding the following line to .config:
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_TDLS_TESTING
2011-03-06 14:53:54 +02:00
Ganesh Prasadh
281ff0aa76 TDLS: Add initial support for TDLS (IEEE Std 802.11z-2010) 2011-03-06 14:53:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
23ab8e863f Clear PeerKey pointer on deinit 2011-03-06 14:52:52 +02:00
Shan Palanisamy
a4dc6e1934 atheros: Add support for setting RSN/WPS IEs in Beacon/Probe Resp 2011-03-06 14:31:59 +02:00
Shan Palanisamy
39b08b5fc0 Indicate assoc vs. reassoc in association event
This allows driver wrappers to indicate whether the association was
done using Association Request/Response or with Reassociation
Request/Response frames.
2011-03-06 14:31:46 +02:00
Shan Palanisamy
d7956add9c FT: Make FT-over-DS configurable (hostapd.conf ft_over_ds=0/1) 2011-03-06 14:31:42 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c0647147c1 Add defines for Valgrind client requests
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_VALGRIND can now be used to enable support for
Valgrind client requests to help in removing some non-issues from
Valgrind reports. This is mainly aimed at allowing unknown ioctl
results to be marked as defined data.
2011-03-06 14:31:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0fa0ad4e17 eloop: Fix integer overflow in long timeouts
If the os_time_t variable used for the expiration time (seconds)
overflows when the registered timeout value is being added,
assume that the event would happen after an infinite time, i.e.,
would not really happen in practice. This fixes issues with
long key timeouts getting converted to immediate expiration due
to the overflow.
2011-03-06 14:31:20 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
9fc6aa9f95 Add Android make files for hostapd and wpa_supplicant 2011-02-27 19:19:43 +02:00
Iain Hibbert
8ce58ceb25 Avoid preprocessor directives in macro arguments
os_snprintf() can be a preprocessor macro and according to
C99 (6.10.3 clause 11) the results of having preprocessor directives
inside the macro arguments is undefined.
2011-02-27 18:59:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
73304dbf65 Allow client control socket location to be overridden
Build options can now be used to replace the location of client
sockets for UNIX domain socket control interface:

CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_CTRL_IFACE_CLIENT_DIR=\"/tmp\"
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_CTRL_IFACE_CLIENT_PREFIX=\"wpa_ctrl_\"
2011-02-27 18:35:33 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
b3f3865e0e Use Android reserved namespace for control interface
On Android, use a special reserved namespace for the UNIX domain
socket.
2011-02-27 18:19:17 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
1480633f96 Use longer timeout in wpa_ctrl_request()
Wait longer for control interface response from wpa_supplicant to
avoid issues with some drivers that have long blocking operations.
2011-02-27 17:08:15 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
36fde1e79c Make wpa_ctrl_close() handle unopened connection 2011-02-27 17:07:07 +02:00
Masashi Honma
28878f8b0e bsd: Use correct size for routing socket
The buffer size for routing socket is fixed to 2048.
This patch fix it to obtain the size from OS.

This patch worked on x86 platform with NetBSD 5.0.2.
2011-02-27 14:01:39 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
4e2ead7a72 Add wpa_supplicant state change event for Android network manager
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2011-02-26 13:20:16 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
2a0cd0670b OpenSSL: Add access to Android certificates
This allows keystore:// prefix to be used with client_cert and
private_key configuration parameters.

Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2011-02-26 12:08:20 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
193f439a8c Add CONFIG_ANDROID_LOG support
This makes wpa_printf() calls use __android_log_vprint(). In addition,
hexdumps are commented out.
2011-02-25 16:44:34 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
1a13534f17 Change executable permissions for Android
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2011-02-25 16:21:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c4d4aebe69 wext: Do not include typedefs for Android build
Android build gets __u32 and friends from
bionic/libc/kernel/arch-x86/asm/types.h and having the typedefs here
causes redefinition errors.
2011-02-25 13:36:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
47c64bfcc7 wext: Sync with linux/wireless.h from wireless-testing.git
This updates the Linux wireless extensions header file to be based
on the latest version (22).
2011-02-25 13:29:52 +02:00
Johannes Berg
56eeb8f299 P2P: Add method to signal lost device
This signal is used to notify users of the P2P
state machine or wpa_supplicant of lost devices.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-24 22:22:16 +02:00
Johannes Berg
c165d81eea P2P: Add p2p_get_peer_found to get peer info
This will only retrieve information about peers that have been fully
discovered, not peers that are only half-discovered based on their Probe
Request frames.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-24 22:05:22 +02:00
Johannes Berg
8fd7dc1b1c P2P: Add new_device flag to dev_found callback
The DBus code will want to have perfect matching of dev_found and the
dev_lost it adds so it doesn't need to keep track internally. Enable
that with a new flag in the core that tracks whether we have already
notified about this -- the existing users can ignore it.

The part where this is always set to 1 if the new device is discovered
by a driver that has P2P in the driver is buggy -- the driver should
feed the P2P peer database and then that should feed the notification
here instead.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-24 21:59:58 +02:00
Konguraj(Raj) Kulanthaivel
c5db8e5170 P2P: Embed publically visible struct in peer info
This embeds some information about each P2P peer that will be publically
visible in a struct that is shared.

The dev_found notification function is also passed the new struct, which
requires some work for the driver-based P2P management.

Signed-off-by: Konguraj(Raj) Kulanthaivel <konguraj.kulanthaivel@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Fabien Marotte <fabienx.marotte@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-24 21:51:17 +02:00
Helmut Schaa
e926bcffd8 hostapd: Inherit correct MAC address for AP VLAN interfaces
When using multiple vifs and dynamic vlan tagging is enabled on any
interface, the created AP VLAN interfaces get the BSSID of the first
AP mode interface instead of the BSSID of the corresponding AP mode
interface.

Example:

wlan0 - xx:xx:xx:xx:x0
wlan1 - xx:xx:xx:xx:x1

Assume a STA connects to the AP interface wlan1 and gets a dynamic
VLAN tag 100 assigned by the RADIUS server. Hostapd will create an AP
VLAN interface wlan1.100 but doesn't set an address for this interface
which results in wlan1.100 getting the same address as wlan0:

wlan1.100 - xx:xx:xx:xx:x0

As a result the STA that was moved to wlan1.100 isn't able to finish its
4-way handshake since mac80211 won't pass its frames to wlan1.100 due to
the different address.

To fix this issue make use of the address of the AP interface when
creating an AP VLAN interface.

Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2011-02-24 21:25:40 +02:00
Ben Greear
24d75245bd AP: Update logging related to inactivity and disassociation
Add MAC addresses for stations and use wpa_msg instead of printf
methods to make it easier to grep logs and find messages for the
station in question.

Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-24 17:44:45 +02:00
Ben Greear
1aae01fc04 Add more wpa_auth debugging messages 2011-02-24 17:35:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
effab86ff2 Remove unneeded OpenSSL error messages from key/cert parsing
If parsing of the certificate or private key succeeds using any of
the tried encoding types, clear the OpenSSL error queue without
showing the pending errors in debug log since they do not really
provide any useful output and can be confusing.
2011-02-22 22:19:55 +02:00
Raghunathan Kailasanathan
58708b3bd1 nl80211: Use nl_atype() from libnl
libnl provides nla_type() which can be used to derive nla_type from
struct nlattr.
2011-02-22 21:48:49 +02:00
Guy Eilam
e4ac6417c7 utils: Corrected a typo in header's name definition
Corrected a typo in the BASE64_H definition that
might cause the header file to be included more than once.

Signed-off-by: Guy Eilam <guy@wizery.com>
2011-02-21 22:44:46 +02:00
Christian Lamparter
6fc34d9fe5 Increase internal TLSs client key exchange buffer
This patch fixes a problem I had when I tried to connect
an embedded system [wpa_supplicant, CONFIG_TLS=internal]
to my TLS secured network.

TLSv1: Send CertificateVerify
TLSv1: CertificateVerify hash - hexdump(len=36): ha .. ha
PKCS #1: pkcs1_generate_encryption_block - Invalid buffer lengths \
                        (modlen=512 outlen=454 inlen=36)

It turned out that a fixed 1000 byte message buffer was just
a little bit too small for the 4096 bit RSA certificates
I'm using.

Signed-off-by: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com>
2011-02-21 18:25:34 +02:00
Helmut Schaa
f39b07d7ed hostapd: Allow coexistance of HT BSSes with WEP/TKIP BSSes
In multi BSS setups it wasn't possible to set up an HT BSS in
conjunction with a WEP/TKIP BSS. HT needed to be turned off entirely
to allow WEP/TKIP BSSes to be used.

In order to allow HT BSSes to coexist with non-HT WEP/TKIP BSSes add a
new BSS conf attribute "disable_11n" which disables HT capabilities on a
single BSS by suppressing HT IEs in the beacon and probe response
frames. Furthermore, mark all STAs associated to a WEP/TKIP BSS as
non-HT STAs. The disable_11n parameter is used internally; no new entry
is parsed from hostapd.conf.

This allows a non-HT WEP/TKIP BSS to coexist with a HT BSS without
having to disable HT mode entirely. Nevertheless, all STAs associated to
the WEP/TKIP BSS will only be served as if they were non-HT STAs.

Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2011-02-21 17:27:16 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
55bce124e5 FT: Fix FT-EAP to set EAPOL Authenticator into authenticated state
This is needed to avoid the EAPOL Authenticator from trying to start
new authentication when FT protocol is used. [Bug 384]
2011-02-20 21:56:56 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7e0318505c FT: Specify source MAC address for RRB messages
Use l2_packet with Ethernet header included so that the source
address for RRB packets can be forced to be the local BSSID. This
fixes problems where unexpected bridge interface address may end
up getting used and the recipient of the frame dropping it as
unknown R0KH/R1KH.
2011-02-20 17:50:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6603a96602 Flush STA entries in hostapd when clearing STAs from kernel
This is needed to keep kernel and hostapd in sync. In addition,
the obsolete entry in hostapd prevented use of Deauthentication
or Disassociation frame with reason code 6/7 mechanism to indicate
to the STA that there is no association if the STA missed the
broadcast Deauthentication frame for any reason.
2011-02-10 22:31:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e3e52e364e hostapd: Fix RADIUS client configuration update on reconfig
The internal pointer to RADIUS client configuration needs to be
updated whenever a new hostapd configuration is loaded. Without
this, freed memory may be dereferenced and this can result in
segmentation faults.
2011-02-10 22:12:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
810f08bab4 Make sure reserved field in WMM IE is set to 0
This was previously left uninitialized for Beacon frames and could
potentially have any value.
2011-02-10 22:10:40 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
50b16da13f Fix CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y build 2011-02-10 20:24:06 +02:00
Ben Greear
f049052b9e Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf()
This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order
to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages.

A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow
CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is
otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout
debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 20:14:46 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2944824315 hostapd: Add require_ht configuration parameter
This can be used to configure hostapd to reject association with
any station that does not support HT PHY.
2011-02-09 15:08:47 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e67b55fb11 wpa_s AP: Deliver EVENT_RX_PROBE_REQ events to AP processing
This is needed to allows WPS PBC session overlap detection to work
with drivers that process Probe Request frames internally. This
code is is run in hostapd, but the wpa_supplicant AP mode did not
have call to the hostapd_probe_req_rx() function even though it
registered handlers for hostapd Probe Request RX callbacks.
2011-02-08 14:32:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d601247ca9 P2P: Allow WPS_PBC command on GO to select on P2P Device Address
An optional parameter, p2p_dev_addr, can now be given to WPS_PBC
command on P2P GO to indicate that only the P2P device with the
specified P2P Device Address is allowed to connect using PBC. If
any other device tries to use PBC, a session overlap is indicated
and the negotiation is rejected with M2D. The command format for
specifying the address is "WPS_PBC p2p_dev_addr=<address>", e.g.,
WPS_PBC p2p_dev_addr=02:03:04:05:06:07

In addition, show the PBC session overlap indication as a WPS failure
event on an AP/GO interface. This particular new case shows up as
"WPS-FAIL msg=4 config_error=12".
2011-02-07 18:28:36 +02:00
Ben Greear
4f1495aefa Add interface name to wpa_msg() output
This makes log files much more readable if multiple interfaces
are being controlled by the same process. The interface name is
added to stdout/file/syslog entries, but not to the messages
sent to control interface monitors to avoid issues with parsing
in external programs.

Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-06 20:39:34 +02:00
Ben Greear
ac6912b5d1 wpa_supplicant: Support 'relog' command to re-open log files
This allows rolling log files:

mv log.txt log.txt.1
wpa_cli relog

Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-06 20:15:19 +02:00
Johannes Berg
0c11c63375 util: Add compact MAC address formatting/parsing
The P2P DBus interface will use addresses for
DBus paths, and uses them without any separators.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-02 17:11:00 +02:00
Johannes Berg
0661eed204 AP: Add callback for STA authorized transitions
Add a callback for station's authorized transitions
to allow wpa_supplicant to emit events in DBus.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-02 16:56:59 +02:00
Johannes Berg
6905dcb1e0 AP: Introduce sta authorized wrappers
To enable making state change notifications on the WLAN_STA_AUTHORIZED
flag, introduce ap_sta_set_authorized(), and to reduce use of the flag
itself also add a wrapper for testing the flag: ap_sta_is_authorized().

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-02 16:52:32 +02:00
Johannes Berg
89e07afb2c nl80211: Use max_remain_on_chan data from nl80211
If the driver advertises max_remain_on_chan data, use it instead of
the hardcoded value of 5000. Keep the default at 5000 since that is the
value used by earlier versions of cfg80211/mac80211 and not advertised
in nl80211 for those.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-01 18:18:32 +02:00
Eliad Peller
f14f5141a0 nl80211: Remove excessive nl80211_set_mode() call
When authenticating, and the interface type is not already
NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION, we need to call wpa_driver_nl80211_set_mode()
only once. Remove the excessive call.

Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
2011-02-01 16:38:38 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7615078caf AP: Make sure ieee80211n_allowed_ht40_channel_pair() gets called
We need to call this function after having completed the neighboring
channel scan to figure out whether HT40 can be used and if so, which
channel is the secondary channel.
2011-02-01 16:09:26 +02:00
Nishant Sarmukadam
1b4d379366 AP: Ensure ieee80211n_supported_ht_capab() gets called to check ht caps
ieee80211n_supported_ht_capab is called after ieee80211n_check_40mhz in
function hostapd_check_ht_capab. ieee80211n_check_40mhz can return 1 in
a valid scenario where the initialization is completed in a callback. In
this case ieee80211n_supported_ht_capab is skipped and hostapd does not
check the ht capabilities reported by the driver. Fix this issue making
sure ieee80211n_supported_ht_capab gets called.

Signed-off-by: Nishant Sarmukadam <nishants@marvell.com>
2011-02-01 16:04:59 +02:00
Johannes Berg
d2da224948 AP: Enable WMM with default parameters by default for HT
If WMM is not disabled explicitly (wmm_enabled=0 in hostapd.conf),
enable WMM automatically whenever HT (ieee80211n) is enabled. Use
the default WMM parameters for AP TX queues and the EDCA parameters
advertised for stations in WMM IE if no overriding values are
included in the configuration.
2011-02-01 14:34:12 +02:00
Johannes Berg
9f51b11395 nl80211: use P2P interface types
We can use the P2P interface types to check if the driver supports P2P
and to tell the kernel that a given interface is going to be used for
P2P (when it is created).

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-01-31 21:49:48 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
df077c6262 Remove obsolete drivers wrappers: atmel, ndiswrapper, ipw, hermes
There is no real reason to maintain these in the current development
branch anymore. If someone really needs support for the obsolete
driver interfaces, these can be found in older wpa_supplicant
branches.

driver_atmel.c
- vendor-specific interface for ATMEL AT76C5XXx cards
- for some old out-of-tree driver; not for the upstream atmel*
  drivers

driver_ndiswrapper.c
- vendor-specific interface for an out-of-tree driver
- ndiswrapper should work with driver_wext.c, too

driver_ipw.c
- vendor-specific interface for old ipw2100/2200 driver
- the upstream driver works with driver_wext.c (and does not work
  with the old interface)

driver_hermes.c
- vendor driver that was not even included in the main wpa_supplicant
  releases
2011-01-30 21:29:25 +02:00
Helmut Schaa
f1bed4a70d nl80211: Make use of the ht opmode bss attribute
In order to enable protection mechanisms for different HT opmodes the
driver needs to be aware of the current HT opmode that is calculated by
hostapd. Hence, pass the current opmode to the nl80211 driver via
the bss attribute NL80211_ATTR_BSS_HT_OPMODE.

Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2011-01-30 21:16:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1161ff1ef5 hostapd: Allow TDLS use to be prohibited in the BSS
tdls_prohibit=1 and tdls_prohibit_chan_switch=1 and now be used to
disable use of TDLS or TDLS channel switching in the BSS using
extended cabilities IE as defined in IEEE 802.11z.
2011-01-28 19:21:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
dfaeda0492 Fix couple of compiler warnings about uninitialized variables 2011-01-26 21:29:28 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
cbcf92b42f AP: Validate management frame length
Make sure that received management frames are long enough before
processing them. This avoids a potential segmentation fault if a
driver delivers an invalid frame all the way to hostapd.
2011-01-17 12:21:29 +02:00
Dan Harkins
e4d7b22a53 EAP-pwd: Fix some interoperability issues
The changes are:

  1. the word "and" in the hunting-and-pecking string passed to the KDF
     should be capitalized.
  2. the primebitlen used in the KDF should be a short not an int.
  3. the computation of MK in hostap is based on an older version of the
     draft and is not the way it's specified in the RFC.
  4. the group being passed into computation of the Commit was not in
     network order.
2011-01-16 13:12:07 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b13d3d63d5 EAP-pwd: Use os_free to free memory allocated with os_malloc
The direct use of free() caused a crash with CONFIG_WPA_TRACE=y.
2011-01-16 13:02:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
bc8318acbc WPA: Add more info for EAPOL-Key Nonce/MIC debugging 2011-01-15 16:57:08 +02:00
Chao-Wen Yang
c5cf0a18f1 WPS: Add mechanism for indicating non-standard WPS errors
Previously, only the Configuration Error values were indicated in
WPS-FAIL events. Since those values are defined in the specification
it is not feasible to extend them for indicating other errors. Add
a new error indication value that is internal to wpa_supplicant and
hostapd to allow other errors to be indicated.

Use the new mechanism to indicate if negotiation fails because of
WEP or TKIP-only configurations being disallows by WPS 2.0.
2011-01-13 17:50:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e24cf97c0d P2P: Check GO Neg Req retransmit limit in p2p_listen_end
This needs to be done both in the more normal location in
p2p_timeout_connect_listen() (internal timeout after driver event) and
in p2p_listen_end() as a workaround for the case where the driver event
is delayed to happen after the internal timeout.
2011-01-12 13:48:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
60ea8187c9 nl80211: Set NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES based on set_key addr
This allows mac80211 to configure default keys properly for RSN IBSS
mode.
2011-01-09 19:54:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0382097ef3 Use set_key addr to distinguish default and multicast keys
Previously, both NULL and ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff addr were used in various
places to indicate default/broadcast keys. Make this more consistent
and useful by defining NULL to mean default key (i.e., used both for
unicast and broadcast) and ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff to indicate broadcast
key (i.e., used only with broadcast).
2011-01-09 19:44:28 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8546ea1930 nl80211: Avoid infinite loop when searching a BSS
When hostapd is removing a virtual BSS interface, the loop here was
incorrectly not updating the iterator during list traversal and
ended up in an infinite loop in some cases.
2011-01-09 19:18:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4d379f1243 Move hostap driver specific workaround into the driver wrapper 2011-01-09 12:50:57 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
dff99f8ec1 Do not use set_tx=1 when clearing keys with set_key 2011-01-09 12:18:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
260832214e Use key=NULL when clearing PTK with set_key
The key clearing operations are using NULL everywhere else, so make
this consistent with other callers.
2011-01-09 12:12:48 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
da64c266e7 Use more consistent set_key seq value when nothing is being set
Use NULL instead of (u8 *) "" as the seq value and make sure the
driver wrapper implementations can handle NULL value. This was
previously already done in number of places, but not everywhere.
2011-01-09 12:09:04 +02:00
Shan Palanisamy
dcc8bf7808 atheros: Rename "madwifi_" prefix to "atheros_" 2010-12-30 16:14:28 +02:00
Yi Zhu
23763c6516 bsd: Fix receive buffer alignment issue
wpa_supplicant seems to crash from time to time on a NetBSD 4.0 MIPS
platform. The root cause turned out to be a MIPS alignment issue.

In my wpa_supplicant crash case, in function
wpa_driver_bsd_event_receive (from driver_bsd.c), the buf[2048] address
is started from i.e. 0x7fffd546, which is not 4 bytes aligned. Later
when it is casted to (struct if_msghdr *), and rtm->rtm_flags is used.
rtm->rtm_flags is "int" type, but its address is not 4 bytes aligned.
This is because the start address of rtm is not 4 bytes aligned.
Unfortunately in NetBSD MIPS kernel (unlike Linux MIPS kernel emulates
unaligned access in its exception handler), the default behavior is to
generate a memory fault to the application that accesses unaligned
memory address. Thus comes the early mentioned wpa_supplicant crash. An
interesting note is when I'm using the wpa_supplicant version 0.4.9, I
never saw this problem. Maybe the stack layout is different. But I
didn't look into details.

I used below patch to resolve this problem. Now it runs correctly for at
least several hours. But you might have a better fix (maybe we can use
malloc/free so that it is at least cache line aligned?). I'm also not
sure if other drivers should have the same problem.
2010-12-30 16:13:19 +02:00
Yi Zhu
9f2951d2fd Fix driver_bsd.c compile error
I got an error for WPA_KEY_RSC_LEN is not defined when compiling the
driver_bsd.c on NetBSD 4.0. Below patch fixed it.
2010-12-30 16:12:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3ac17eba31 P2P: Add initial support for driver-based P2P management
This adds partial callbacks and events to allow P2P management to be
implemented in a driver/firmware. This is not yet complete and is
very much subject to change in the future.
2010-12-30 12:48:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f981eabcf0 WPS: Add option to disable open networks by default
CONFIG_WPS_REG_DISABLE_OPEN=y can be used to configure wpa_supplicant
to disable open networks by default when wps_reg command is used to
learn the current AP settings. When this is enabled, there will be a
WPS-OPEN-NETWORK ctrl_iface event and the user will need to explicitly
enable the network (e.g., with "select_network <id>") to connect to
the open network.
2010-12-30 12:28:13 +02:00
Johannes Berg
5dfca53fc0 nl80211: Use driver-based off-channel TX if available
If the underlying driver supports off-channel TX, it will now be used by
the nl80211 driver wrapper, setting WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_OFFCHANNEL_TX
accordingly.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-12-29 14:05:34 +02:00
Johannes Berg
190b9062b2 P2P: Add option for offloading off-channel TX to the driver
With the new kernel functionality coming to Linux to allow off-channel
TX, we can take advantage of that in the P2P code that currently uses
remain-on-channel. If a driver advertises support for it, it will be
asked to handle off-channel TX by itself.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-12-29 13:59:17 +02:00
Johannes Berg
0d7e5a3a29 Allow AP mode to disconnect STAs based on low ACK condition
The nl80211 driver can report low ACK condition (in fact it reports
complete loss right now only). Use that, along with a config option, to
disconnect stations when the data connection is not working properly,
e.g., due to the STA having went outside the range of the AP. This is
disabled by default and can be enabled with disassoc_low_ack=1 in
hostapd or wpa_supplicant configuration file.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-12-28 17:15:01 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d3e01b9d71 Re-initialize EAP ClientTimeout on for each session
ClientTimeout changes from EAP peer methods were not supposed to
change behavior for other EAP peer methods or even other sessions
of the same method. Re-initialize ClientTimeout whenever an EAP
peer method is initialized to avoid this. This addresses problems
where WPS (EAP-WSC) reduces the timeout and consecutive EAP runs
may fail due to too small timeout.
2010-12-28 12:09:14 +02:00
Fabien Marotte
9dac8c3eaf P2P: Limit the retransmission of GO Negotiation request to 120
If the peer you want to connect to is no longer available (does not
acknowledge frames) when wpa_supplicant sends GO Negotition Request
frames, retransmission of this frame is done until the associated
p2p_device  structure is removed on timeout. In that case, no signal
is emitted to  inform the GO Negotiation has failed.

When sending an Invitation Request frame, the same retransmission
mechanism is in place but limit the transmission to 100 and hitting
the limit generates an event.

This patch adds the same mechanism as the one in place for Invitation
Request, but with limit of 120 to match the existing wait_count for
for GO Negotiation.
2010-12-28 11:48:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d19f5fc881 WPS: Include all Config Methods in Probe Request
Do not use active PBC state to figure out which ConfigMethods are
included in Probe Request; instead, include all supported ones.
2010-12-20 12:54:10 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
79c3124ce5 nl80211: Remove extra \n from debug messages 2010-12-19 12:00:24 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7d878ca769 Use SA Query procedure to recovery from AP/STA state mismatch
If a station received unprotected Deauthentication or Disassociation
frame with reason code 6 or 7 from the current AP, there may be a
mismatch in association state between the AP and STA. Verify whether
this is the case by using SA Query procedure. If not response is
received from the AP, deauthenticate.

This implementation is only for user space SME with
driver_nl80211.c.
2010-12-19 11:58:00 +02:00
Johannes Berg
5efa9e2a4b P2P: Allow access to group members
Some new code will require access to P2P group members, so add API to
retrieve the number of members and iterate the members themselves.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-12-17 18:34:16 +02:00
Sudhakar Swaminathan
231bbd0375 P2P: Unauthorize pending P2P GO Neg peer on p2p_cancel
If there is a pending GO Negotiation when p2p_cancel is used,
unauthorize the peer to avoid immediate reconnection from being
accepted without a new p2p_connect command.
2010-12-17 15:05:35 +02:00
Masashi Honma
2136f48020 nl80211: Stop driver init sooner if the interface does not exist 2010-12-17 13:55:13 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2397086869 nl80211: Add forgotten deinit code on failure path 2010-12-17 13:49:38 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
278ef89f3f nl80211: Sync definitions with wireless-testing.git 2010-12-17 13:07:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b3a6d9d400 wlantest: Add send command for injecting raw frames
This can be used by external programs (e.g., wlantest_cli) to inject
raw frames (hex dump of the frame header and body). The data can be
requested to be sent as-is or protected with the current key.
2010-12-16 16:11:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b993e77b5b Removed unused variable from non-Linux builds 2010-12-14 17:10:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
aca0160548 nl80211: Set cipher suites when using user space SME
Previously, pairwise and group cipher suites were configured only
when kernel SME (nl80211 connect API) was used. However, mac80211
needs this information even in the user space SME case for one
thing: to disable HT when TKIP/WEP is used. Add
NL80211_ATTR_CIPHER_SUITES_PAIRWISE to fix this special case with
user space SME. This allows mac80211 to disable HT properly when
the AP is configured with configuration that is not allowed.
2010-12-13 21:08:53 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b39f58347d wlantest: Add support for decrypting TDLS frames
Derive TPK based on TDLS TPK Handshake and decrypt frames on the
direct link with TPK-TK.
2010-12-13 11:20:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
89c38e32c7 RSN IBSS: RX GTK configuration with nl80211
This add preliminary code for setting the per-STA RX GTK for
RSN IBSS when nl80211 drivers. For some reason, this does not
seem to fully work, but at least driver_nl80211.c is now aware of
what kind of key is being set and the whatever is missing from
making this key configuration go through should be specific to
nl80211/cfg80211.
2010-12-04 20:31:22 -08:00
Jouni Malinen
18d2ba083b nl80211: Generate EVENT_IBSS_RSN_START events
This is needed to trigger start of 4-way handshake when a new STA is
detected in an RSN IBSS.
2010-12-04 18:17:58 -08:00
Jouni Malinen
1df492df34 Do not send Deauth/Disassoc to unknown STA if SA is invalid
The frame needs to be sent from an individual (non-group) address,
so drop invalid frames before sending Deauth/Disassoc frames to
not associated STAs.
2010-12-04 17:40:36 -08:00
Jouni Malinen
c4d7fc90a2 Fix EAP-FAST PAC file writer to avoid crash with multiple PACs
One of the pointers to the PAC buffer was not updated after realloc
and if the realloc ended up returning new pointer, the *pos pointer
was still pointing at the old location (i.e., freed memory at
this point).
2010-12-04 11:37:41 -08:00
Jouni Malinen
482856c8ba nl80211: Fix compiler warnings on non-P2P build 2010-11-27 13:05:37 +02:00
Ben Greear
6859f1cb24 Enable sharing of scan result events among virtual interfaces
When controlling multiple virtual interfaces on the same physical
radio, share the scan results events with sibling interfaces. This
decreases the time it takes to connect many virtual interfaces.

This is currently only supported on Linux with cfg80211-based
drivers when using nl80211 or wext driver interface.

Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2010-11-26 21:46:30 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f2ed8023c4 nl80211: Track used interfaces and support multiple P2P groups
Track all the P2P group interfaces within driver_nl80211.c to make
it easier to generate unique P2P Interface Addresses.
2010-11-26 18:14:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
871f4dd069 Allow driver wrappers to indicate whether result codes are sane
Some drivers are not providing exactly reliable error codes (e.g.,
with WEXT), but others may actually indicate reliable information.
Allow driver wrappers to indicate if that is the case and use
optimizations if so. For now, this improves nl80211 with
NL80211_CMD_CONNECT for a case where connection request fails.
2010-11-26 17:41:21 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
df89c1c8d1 nl80211: Add BSSID to NL80211_CMD_CONNECT assoc reject event 2010-11-26 17:40:10 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ce04af5a74 nl80211: Fix NL80211_CMD_CONNECT with WPA/WPS networks 2010-11-26 17:39:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c55f774d00 nl80211: Add preliminary code for testing separate P2P group interface
driver_param=use_p2p_group_interface=1 can now be used to test
nl80211-drivers with separate P2P group interface. In other words,
the main interface (e.g., wlan0) is reserved for P2P management
operations and non-P2P connections and a new group interface (e.g.,
p2p-wlan0-0) is created for the P2P group.

This implementation is very minimal, i.e., it only support address
allocation for a single P2P group interface (if the driver does not
handle this internally). In addition, not all functionality has yet
been tested, so for now, this is disabled by default and needs that
special driver_param to enable.
2010-11-26 15:54:53 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
971e357f19 P2P: Add new driver option for interface allocation
WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_P2P_MGMT_AND_NON_P2P flag can now be used to
indicate that the initial interface (e.g., wlan0) is used for
P2P management operations and potentially non-P2P connections.
This is otherwise identical to
WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_P2P_DEDICATED_INTERFACE, but the possibility of
non-P2P connections makes some operations differ.
2010-11-26 15:52:16 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
805253d820 random: Fix a compiler warning about unused variable
In CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y case, the error variable was not used.
2010-11-25 23:32:17 +02:00
Sudhakar Swaminathan
9d562b7946 P2P: Add p2p_unauthorize command
This can be used to remove authorization from a previous p2p_connect
commands that has not yet resulted in completed GO Negotiation.
2010-11-25 13:09:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7392f11e96 Convert most commonly used drv ops to real function calls
Getting rid of these inline functions seems to reduce the code size
quite a bit, so convert the most commonly used hostapd driver ops to
function calls.
2010-11-24 17:01:21 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0e8a96a911 Get rid of struct hostapd_driver_ops abstraction
This is not needed anymore and just makes things more difficult
to understand, so move the remaining function pointers to direct
function calls and get rid of the struct hostapd_driver_ops.
2010-11-24 16:50:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3acdf771b8 hostapd_driver_ops reduction
send_eapol, set_key, read_sta_data, sta_clear_stats,
set_radius_acl_auth, set_radius_acl_expire, and set_beacon
to use inline functions instead of extra abstraction.
2010-11-24 16:34:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
51e2a27a21 hostapd_driver_ops reduction
set_sta_vlan, get_inact_sec, sta_deauth, sta_disassoc, and sta_remove
to use inline functions instead of extra abstraction.
2010-11-24 15:36:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b5b1b18f39 hostapd_driver_ops reduction: set_countermeasures 2010-11-24 15:26:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
cee7d66b1d hostapd: Start removing struct hostapd_driver_ops abstraction
Commit bf65bc638f started the path to
add this new abstraction for driver operations in AP mode to allow
wpa_supplicant to control AP mode operations. At that point, the
extra abstraction was needed, but it is not needed anymore since
hostapd and wpa_supplicant share the same struct wpa_driver_ops.

Start removing the unneeded abstraction by converting
send_mgmt_frame() to an inline function, hostapd_drv_send_mlme().
This is similar to the design that is used in wpa_supplicant and
that was used in hostapd in the past (hostapd_send_mgmt_frame()
inline function).
2010-11-24 15:19:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
719007f5c0 l2_packet: Use wpa_printf() instead of perror() 2010-11-24 15:00:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ebbec8b2fa nl80211: Fix send commands to return 0 on success
driver.h defines these functions to return 0 on success, not
number of bytes transmitted. Most callers are checking "< 0" for
error condition, but not all. Address this by following the driver
API specification on 0 meaning success.
2010-11-24 14:58:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
08704cd885 hostapd: Verify availability of random data when using WPA/WPA2
On Linux, verify that the kernel entropy pool is capable of providing
strong random data before allowing WPA/WPA2 connection to be
established. If 20 bytes of data cannot be read from /dev/random,
force first two 4-way handshakes to fail while collecting entropy
into the internal pool in hostapd. After that, give up on /dev/random
and allow the AP to function based on the combination of /dev/urandom
and whatever data has been collected into the internal entropy pool.
2010-11-24 13:08:03 +02:00
Masashi Honma
dbb6ed7e75 Fix memory leak on EAPOL Authenticator error path
wlan0: RADIUS No authentication server configured
MEMLEAK[0x999feb8]: len 1040
WPA_TRACE: memleak - START
[3]: ./hostapd(radius_msg_new+0x33) [0x8074f43]
     radius_msg_new() ../src/radius/radius.c:117
[4]: ./hostapd() [0x806095e]
     ieee802_1x_encapsulate_radius() ../src/ap/ieee802_1x.c:439
     ieee802_1x_aaa_send() ../src/ap/ieee802_1x.c:1496

For example, this error occured when I used WPS hostapd without
"eap_server=1" definition in configuration file.
2010-11-24 01:42:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
bbb921daaa Maintain internal entropy pool for augmenting random number generation
By default, make hostapd and wpa_supplicant maintain an internal
entropy pool that is fed with following information:

hostapd:
- Probe Request frames (timing, RSSI)
- Association events (timing)
- SNonce from Supplicants

wpa_supplicant:
- Scan results (timing, signal/noise)
- Association events (timing)

The internal pool is used to augment the random numbers generated
with the OS mechanism (os_get_random()). While the internal
implementation is not expected to be very strong due to limited
amount of generic (non-platform specific) information to feed the
pool, this may strengthen key derivation on some devices that are
not configured to provide strong random numbers through
os_get_random() (e.g., /dev/urandom on Linux/BSD).

This new mechanism is not supposed to replace proper OS provided
random number generation mechanism. The OS mechanism needs to be
initialized properly (e.g., hw random number generator,
maintaining entropy pool over reboots, etc.) for any of the
security assumptions to hold.

If the os_get_random() is known to provide strong ramdom data (e.g., on
Linux/BSD, the board in question is known to have reliable source of
random data from /dev/urandom), the internal hostapd random pool can be
disabled. This will save some in binary size and CPU use. However, this
should only be considered for builds that are known to be used on
devices that meet the requirements described above. The internal pool
is disabled by adding CONFIG_NO_RANDOM_POOL=y to the .config file.
2010-11-24 01:29:40 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3642c4313a Annotate places depending on strong random numbers
This commit adds a new wrapper, random_get_bytes(), that is currently
defined to use os_get_random() as is. The places using
random_get_bytes() depend on the returned value being strong random
number, i.e., something that is infeasible for external device to
figure out. These values are used either directly as a key or as
nonces/challenges that are used as input for key derivation or
authentication.

The remaining direct uses of os_get_random() do not need as strong
random numbers to function correctly.
2010-11-24 01:05:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1bdb7ab3af Re-initialize GMK and Key Counter on first station connection
This adds more time for the system entropy pool to be filled before
requesting random data for generating the WPA/WPA2 encryption keys.
This can be helpful especially on embedded devices that do not have
hardware random number generator and may lack good sources of
randomness especially early in the bootup sequence when hostapd is
likely to be started.

GMK and Key Counter are still initialized once in the beginning to
match the RSN Authenticator state machine behavior and to make sure
that the driver does not transmit broadcast frames unencrypted.
However, both GMK (and GTK derived from it) and Key Counter will be
re-initialized when the first station connects and is about to
enter 4-way handshake.
2010-11-24 00:52:46 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3c7302c219 Report errors from key derivation/configuration
Eventually, these should be acted on, so at least get the return
values passed one layer up.
2010-11-23 01:05:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5cb9d5c3d1 Mix in more data to GTK/IGTK derivation
The example GMK-to-GTK derivation described in the IEEE 802.11 standard
is marked informative and there is no protocol reason for following it
since this derivation is done only on the AP/Authenticator and does not
need to match with the Supplicant. Mix in more data into the derivation
process to get more separation from GMK.
2010-11-23 00:57:14 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e3acc8f1c8 edit: Clear edit line on deinit 2010-11-21 12:07:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
566aef60ab edit: Limit maximum number of history entries to 100 2010-11-21 12:04:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
70de7d56fe edit: Implement history file read/write 2010-11-21 12:01:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
19ec1f262e edit: Fix history prev selection 2010-11-21 11:49:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8953e9681a edit: Move history save file specification to caller 2010-11-21 11:43:09 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ec9aac9468 edit: Use struct dl_list for history buffer 2010-11-21 11:25:34 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
31e1206baa edit: Fix delete_word when not in the end of line 2010-11-20 23:05:12 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
464144a43b edit: Add history buffer search
Ctrl-R can now be used to start history search mode.
2010-11-20 17:55:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
42034d6f60 edit: Clean up escape code parser 2010-11-20 16:59:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0bee81352f edit: Split escape code parsing into a separate function
This makes edit_read_char() simpler and easier to extend since it
does not need to know anything about the escape codes anymore.
2010-11-20 15:55:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ef6ee3e5a3 edit: Sort completion list 2010-11-20 12:41:15 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
9364990ace edit: Really fix the completion of last character
The previous commit broke completion in various places. The proper
way of handling the completion of full word is to verify whether
there are more than one possible match at that point.
2010-11-20 12:27:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
414780027a edit: Fix completion at the last character
Completion needs to be done even if the full word has been entered.
In addition, fix the space-after-full-word to properly allocate room
for the extra character when completion is used in the middle of the
string.
2010-11-20 11:59:04 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
89eb6b774d edit: Fix delete word to update current position 2010-11-20 11:48:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e4f13f9256 edit: Fix completion of arguments other than the first one 2010-11-20 11:45:42 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
73669f1b03 edit: Fix Home/End escape codes 2010-11-20 11:20:48 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ef49bb80a9 wlantest: Add interactive mode to wlantest_cli 2010-11-20 10:48:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7302a35ed4 edit: Add string completion support on tab 2010-11-20 00:42:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7d23e971f0 wlantest: Add preliminary infrastructure for injecting frames
This adds new commands for wlantest_cli to request wlantest to
inject frames. This version can only send out Authentication
frames and unprotected SA Query Request frames, but there is
now place to add more frames and encryption with future commits.
2010-11-19 00:35:13 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
9dd7d6b09c WPS: Add special AP Setup Locked mode to allow read only ER
ap_setup_locked=2 can now be used to enable a special mode where
WPS ER can learn the current AP settings, but cannot change then.
In other words, the protocol is allowed to continue past M2, but
is stopped at M7 when AP is in this mode. WPS IE does not
advertise AP Setup Locked in this case to avoid interoperability
issues.

In wpa_supplicant, use ap_setup_locked=2 by default. Since the AP PIN
is disabled by default, this does not enable any new functionality
automatically. To allow the read-only ER to go through the protocol,
wps_ap_pin command needs to be used to enable the AP PIN.
2010-11-17 16:48:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e8ecb5fb49 Move wpa_cli readline integration into src/utils/edit_readline.c
All three line editing options are now located in src/utils/edit*.c
and provide the same API to allow easy build time selection.
2010-11-14 22:37:43 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
bdc45634f0 wpa_cli: Use edit API as a wrapper for optional readline 2010-11-14 21:19:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
616e0e728e edit: Redraw input line on ^L 2010-11-14 21:03:24 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
82a855bda8 Move command line editing routines into src/utils/edit*.[ch]
This allows the same routines to be shared with other programs
since these are not really specific to wpa_cli.
2010-11-14 20:59:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f3b87561d7 Share WPA IE parser function for RSN authenticator/supplicant
There is no point in maintaining two almost identical versions
of this parser. Move WPA IE parser into wpa_common.c similarly
to what was already the case with RSN IE parse.
2010-11-12 21:52:14 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8ea3dd21d2 AP: Verify that HT40 secondary channel is supported
Refuse to enable HT40 mode AP unless both the primary and secondary
channels are enabled for AP use.
2010-11-12 18:31:56 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d8e66e80b9 Add HT40 flags into driver channel list
This can be used to figure out whether the driver would allow
HT40-/HT40+ on any specific channel.
2010-11-12 18:13:37 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
bc8714283d WPS: Fix UPnP deinit order to avoid using freed memory
When multiple wireless interfaces are used with WPS, the UPnP
subscriptions need to be removed whenever a matching Registrar
instance gets removed. This avoids a segfault due to access to
freed memory during hostapd shutdown.

In addition, the UPnP interface instance structure needs to be
freed to avoid memory leak.
2010-11-11 16:56:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c17b1e274f WPS ER: Fix compiler warning on non-WPS2 builds 2010-11-11 14:54:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
fd806bac5f WPS: Change concurrent radio AP to use only one WPS UPnP instance
WPS external Registrars can get confused about multiple UPnP
instances (one per radio) on a dual-concurrent APs. Simplify the
design by sharing a single UPnP state machine for all wireless
interfaces controlled by hostapd. This matches with the previous
changes that made a single command enable WPS functionality on
all interfaces.

This is relatively minimal change to address the sharing of the
state among multiple struct hostapd_data instances. More cleanup
can be done separately to remove unnecessary copies of information.
2010-11-11 14:50:13 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
91626c9fa7 P2P: Reselect operating channel preference based on best channels
When the peer does not include our initial preference in the Channel
List attribute during GO Negotiation, try to use the best channel of
the other band as the new preference instead of falling back to the
first channel in the intersection.
2010-11-10 13:34:33 +02:00
Anil Gathala Sudha
7cfc4ac319 P2P: Add support for automatic channel selection at GO
The driver wrapper may now indicate the preferred channel (e.g., based
on scan results) on both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands (and an overall best
frequency). When setting up a GO, this preference information is used
to select the operating channel if configuration does not include
hardcoded channel. Similarly, this information can be used during
GO Negotiation to indicate preference for a specific channel based
on current channel conditions.

p2p_group_add command can now use special values (freq=2 and freq=5)
to indicate that the GO is to be started on the specified band.
2010-11-10 13:33:47 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4d9f9ee7e5 wlantest: Parse Key Data KDEs and store GTK and IGTK 2010-11-09 20:29:12 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
c2aa25fb34 hostapd: Fix config reload for multi-BSS
Secondary BSS interfaces need to be activated after the config has
been reloaded.
2010-11-09 16:35:49 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
d3b4286967 Allow client isolation to be configured (ap_isolate=1)
Client isolation can be used to prevent low-level bridging of frames
between associated stations in the BSS. By default, this bridging is
allowed.
2010-11-09 16:27:15 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
5a5009dc92 Fix rate table handling
With the nl80211 driver, the rate table is mode dependent, so it
must be initialized after the hardware mode has been selected.
2010-11-09 16:17:50 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
d38ae2ea85 Add bridge handling for WDS STA interfaces
By default, add them to the configured bridge of the AP interface
(if present), but allow the user to specify a separate bridge.
2010-11-09 16:12:42 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
4a8c72959e nl80211: Fix AP VLAN handling for WDS STA reassociation
When a STA reassociates, the AP VLAN interface is still present,
do not attempt to create it in that case.
2010-11-09 16:03:05 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
7826ceae91 Fix WDS STA reassociation
If the STA entry is present in hostapd, but not in the kernel driver, its
WDS status needs to be restored when the STA reassociates
2010-11-09 16:00:09 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
3efb432952 driver_roboswitch: include net/if.h instead of linux/if.h
including linux/if.h clashes with other header files on some systems
2010-11-09 15:55:34 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
089da7c32b driver_madwifi: fix a compile error on big endian systems 2010-11-09 15:53:56 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
22a062815d WPS: Add wildcard AuthorizedMACs entry for PBC 2010-11-09 11:24:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
43882f1efc Allow TSN AP to be selected when configured for WEP
Commit d8d940b746 introduced a regression
that prevented TSN APs from being used with WEP since the AP was
rejected if it advertised WPA or RSN IE when we were configured to use
WEP. Resolve this by checking whether the AP is advertising a TSN, i.e.,
whether the AP allows WEP to be used as a group cipher. If so, allow
the AP to be selected if we are configured to use static WEP or
IEEE 802.1X (non-WPA).

It should be noted that this is still somewhat more restricted in AP
selection than earlier wpa_supplicant branches (0.7.x or older) that
ignore the WPA/RSN IE completely when configured for non-WPA.
2010-11-08 21:14:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a149fcc77d wlantest: Add preliminary version of IEEE 802.11 protocol testing tool
This tool can be used to capture IEEE 802.11 frames either from a
monitor interface for realtime capturing or from pcap files for
offline analysis. This version is only adding basic infrastructure for
going through the frames and parsing their headers.
2010-11-07 23:29:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6fc58a89e1 Fix EAP standalone server
Commit c3fc47ea8e fixed EAP passthrough
server to allow Logoff/Re-authentication to be used. However, it
broke EAP standalone server while doing that. Fix this by reverting
the earlier fix and by clearing the EAP Identity information in the
EAP server code whenever an EAPOL-Start or EAPOL-Logoff packet is
received.
2010-11-07 16:25:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f44ae20783 P2P: Drop pending TX frame on new p2p_connect
We need to drop the pending frame to avoid issues with the new GO
Negotiation, e.g., when the pending frame was from a previous attempt at
starting a GO Negotiation.
2010-11-05 18:17:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7e3c178142 Remove unused TX queue parameters related to Beacon frames
These are not used by any driver wrapper, i.e., only the four
data queues (BK, BE, VI, VO) are configurable. Better remove these
so that there is no confusion about being able to configure
something additional.
2010-11-05 01:23:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ccb7e5ee59 WPS: Send WSC_NACK if message without Message Type is received 2010-11-04 18:17:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4a64a51b63 WPS: Share common function for building WSC ACK/NACK
These are identical functions in Enrollee and Registrar and there
is no need to maintain two copies of the same functionality.
2010-11-04 18:16:14 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7b23f0f3c8 WPS: Do not advertise support for WEP in WPS 2.0 build
There is no point in advertising support for WEP or Shared Key
authentication if we are going to reject those anyway based on
WPS 2.0 rules.
2010-11-04 17:37:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c7c0ddfd91 WPS: Remove PushButton from M1 ConfigMethods on AP
These config methods are for the Enrollee role, i.e., for adding
external Registrars, and as such, PushButton should not be claimed
to be supported.
2010-11-04 17:29:48 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6e1468839c nl80211: Allow libnl to be replaced with libnl-tiny
CONFIG_LIBNL_TINY=y can be used to select libnl-tiny instead of
libnl.
2010-11-04 17:14:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8dcb61ce5d WPS: Comment out WEP configuration lines on reconfig 2010-11-04 17:02:16 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
07fef399a1 WPS ER: Clear WPS state if PutMessage does not include NewOutMessage
This is needed to avoid getting stuck with pending WPS operation, e.g.,
when an AP replies to WSC_NACK with HTTP OK, but without following
message.
2010-11-02 11:20:54 +02:00
Helmut Schaa
65ae1afd44 nl80211: Pass data frames from unknown STAs to hostapd
Pass data frames from unknown STAs to hostapd in order to reply with
a Deauthentication or Disassociation frame. This fixes compliance
with IEEE Std 802.11-2007, 11.3.

Furthermore, this does not cause a lot of overhead (at least with
mac80211 drivers) since mac80211 does not pass all data frames (but
at least from unauthenticated and unassociated STAs) to cooked monitor
interfaces.

Tested with rt2800pci on a MIPS board.

Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2010-10-31 21:36:43 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d96e79f1e7 Make wpa_hexdump_buf{,-key} handle NULL buffer
This matches with behavior of other wpa_hexdump* functions.
2010-10-31 12:09:18 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
7a6a6374f2 Clear vars in drivers makefile
drivers.mak is shared between hostapd and wpa_supplicant and
compiling them together may create "wrong" flags.

Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2010-10-31 11:59:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5245483f80 WPS ER: Add validation of WPS attributes in proxied Probe Request
When strict validation is enabled in the build, check the WPS
attributes in proxied Probe Request frames.
2010-10-31 11:57:13 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ea78c315a2 Add ctrl_interface event for association rejected 2010-10-27 20:28:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
59ddf221c8 Add BSSID to association rejected events 2010-10-27 20:27:39 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
10c4edde6e P2P: Do not re-send PD Request for join-a-group after acked frame
We are not actually interested in the PD Response in join-a-group
case, so there is no point in trying to send PD Request until the
response is received. This avoids an extra PD getting started after
a join-a-group operation in some cases.
2010-10-27 19:36:10 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c926593119 Allow EAPOL frames from pre-authenticating station to be processed 2010-10-27 11:34:29 +03:00
Shan Palanisamy
d143bdc862 atheros: Remove debug for ioctls that are not used anymore
This is needed to fix build with a newer driver version.
2010-10-27 11:33:40 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e11f5a2cbc hostapd: Set operstate UP when initializing AP mode
This is needed to avoid problems with other applications setting and
leaving the interface to IF_OPER_DORMANT state. In AP mode, the interface
is ready immediately after the keys are set, so we better make sure the
DORMANT state does not prevent normal operations after that.
2010-10-26 16:30:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4e0c025d13 P2P: Fix parsing of UTF-8 device names
The control character verification was supposed to only replace
bytes 0..31, not 0..31 and 128..255 as happened on systems where
char is signed.
2010-10-26 10:40:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
be88391dee WPS ER: Cache AP settings for APs that restart UPnP
This is needed to avoid issues with APs that restart their UPnP,
e.g., when ER reconfigures them. The previously known settings are
now cached and taken into use if an AP is detected to leave
(ssdp:byebye) and then return.
2010-10-25 22:22:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ed159ad41b WPS ER: Add more details to wps_er_pbc failure returns
Indicate the reason for the failure when wps_er_pbc is rejected.
2010-10-25 21:59:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
669f322d0e WPS ER: Fix SetSelectedRegistrar to include wildcard AuthorizedMACs
This is required by WPS 2.0, so add the wildcard address to
AuthorizedMACs if no addresses are in the list.
2010-10-25 21:45:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
20ebd9c4b9 WPS ER: Only activate PBC mode on single AP
Verify that the UUID given to wps_er_pbc command is known and only
activate PBC mode on the matching AP. The UUID can be that of the
AP or the station/Enrollee.
2010-10-25 21:41:10 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3e7533b399 WPS ER: Show SetSelectedRegistrar events as ctrl_iface events
This makes it easier to figure out if something goes wrong in
preparing the AP for enrolling a station.
2010-10-25 21:29:22 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c973f3868a P2P: Remove P2P group on driver resource becoming unavailable
Add a new driver event, EVENT_INTERFACE_UNAVAILABLE, for indicating
that the driver is not able to continue operating the virtual
interface in its current mode anymore, e.g., due to operating
channel for GO interface forced to a DFS channel by another virtual
interface.

When this happens for a P2P group interface, the P2P group will
be terminated and P2P-GROUP-REMOVED event shows the reason for
this as follows:
P2P-GROUP-REMOVED wlan0 GO reason=UNAVAILABLE
2010-10-25 19:16:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3071e18109 P2P: Add mechanism for timing out idle groups
A new configuration parameter, p2p_group_idle, can now be used to set
idle timeout value for P2P groups in seconds (0 = no timeout). If set,
this values is used to remove P2P group (both GO and P2P client)
interfaces after the group has been idle (no clients/GO seen) for the
configuration duration.

The P2P-GROUP-REMOVED event is now indicating the reason for group
removal when known. For example:
P2P-GROUP-REMOVED wlan0 GO reason=REQUESTED
P2P-GROUP-REMOVED wlan1 client reason=IDLE
2010-10-25 18:24:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1f4c7b6b2a hostapd: Fix compiler warning
Commit 83e843e830 copied a workaround
without updating the return value to match with the void function.
2010-10-25 13:38:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
83e843e830 hostapd: Avoid crashing on station mode disassoc event
Some driver wrappers may end up indicating a disassociation or
deauthentication event without the address of the station, e.g.,
based on a previous non-AP mode event. Avoid crashing hostapd
by verifying that the require address parameter is available in
the event before processing it.
2010-10-22 17:43:23 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
450eddcfae hostapd: Add wps_config ctrl_interface command for configuring AP
This command can be used to configure the AP using the internal
WPS registrar. It works in the same way as new AP settings received
from an ER.
2010-10-21 16:49:41 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7374b68ee9 P2P: Fix p2p_send_action conversions
Couple of these missed the change in the first argument and resulted
in various crashes.
2010-10-20 21:32:18 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3f9285ff19 P2P: Delay send_action call if p2p_scan is in progress
In order to avoid confusing the driver with a new remain-on-channel
request, delay sending of a new Action frame if the driver indicates
Action frame RX diromg a scan.
2010-10-20 19:44:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0b8889d8e5 P2P: Do not stop Listen state if it is on correct channel
This is needed to optimize response to GO Negotiation Request frames.
The extra remain-on-channel cancel followed by new remain-on-channel for
the same channel takes too much time with some driver/firmware
designs for the response to go out quickly enough to avoid peer
timing out while waiting for our response.
2010-10-20 19:44:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ef10f4733f WPS ER: Add wps_er_set_config to use local configuration
This command can be used to enroll a network based on a local
network configuration block instead of having to (re-)learn the
current AP settings with wps_er_learn.
2010-10-20 13:37:01 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
cbbf4a1cc3 WPS: Fix a compiler warning in hostapd_wps_update_ie() 2010-10-20 13:35:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2c8a4eef41 WPS: Update Beacon/ProbeResp IE on wps_version_number changes
This test command is supposed to change the WPS version number in all
places immediately, so make sure that the IEs used in management
frames get updated immediately.
2010-10-19 19:57:01 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3f4ce13fde P2P: Track non-P2P members in the group and set Group Limit bit
The P2P group component is now tracking of associated stations
in the group and the Group Limit bit in the Group Capabilities
is updated based on whether there is room for new clients in
the group.
2010-10-19 18:10:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
93b7ddd032 P2P: Skip GO Neg Conf ack failure workaround of send failures
The workaround to ignore no ctrl::ack received for GO Negotiation
Confirmation frame was only supposed to be used when the frame was
actually transmitted and just the ack was not received. However, due
to the way the driver failure on transmitting the frame were reported,
this ended up getting applied for all failures in sending the GO
Negotiation Confirmation frame.

Improve this by providing a mechanism to indicate whether send_action
operations fail locally before the frame was actually transmitted or
because of not receiving ack frame after having transmitted the frame.
2010-10-19 12:47:33 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2b67a67144 WPS UPnP: Add more debug for event subscription 2010-10-19 12:43:48 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
99ba7f889b WPS: Do not drop subscriptions based on max queue length
UPnP event subscriptions are not supposed to be dropped based on
whether events can be delivered quickly enough. Leave dropping to
happen only based on failed deliveries to avoid issues with a burst
of events kicking out still active subscribers.
2010-10-17 21:36:04 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f30e698c08 WPS UPnP: Add more priority for queuing EAP events 2010-10-17 21:30:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
08a98b6544 WPS UPnP: Throttle WLANEvent notifications to 5 per second
Do not send more than five Probe Request WLANEvent notifications
per second. Even though the limit should in theory apply to all
WLANEvents, it is better not to drop EAP notifications because
of Probe Request frames and really, the only real reason for
event bursts is Probe Request frames.
2010-10-17 21:24:12 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3904567d0b WPS: Limit Probe Request event queuing if subscriber may have left
Instead of queuing all events for a subscriber, only queue more
important events if delivery of event notifications starts failing.
This allows more time for the subscriber to recover since the maximum
queue length if not reached because of Probe Request frames only.
2010-10-17 20:58:58 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d1e17fbc9c WPS: Schedule sending of pending events after failure
There is no point leaving these pending events waiting for something
new to trigger us to continue.
2010-10-17 20:57:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8c3a2f11ab WPS: Separate local error from max queue length reached
Drop subscription only if the max queue length has been reached;
not based on any error.
2010-10-17 20:29:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
dd50c2d425 WPS UPnP: Improved event notification failure processing
Instead of dropping the subscription on first failure, allow up to
10 failures before dropping. In addition, drop the callback URLs
one by one instead of full subscription if only one URL is failing.
2010-10-17 20:26:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
10fb1a984f WPS: Convert assert() to error return 2010-10-17 20:23:51 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1f1d4df09a WPS UPnP: Fix memory leak on retry case
The event entry needs to be freed when giving up on retries.
2010-10-17 20:22:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3953627b35 WPS: Add more debug info for UPnP operations 2010-10-17 20:20:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ed31b5ebcf WPS: Remove unused define
This timeout value was moved to now separate HTTP client implementation.
2010-10-17 20:15:08 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
75c3fc2e8a WPS: Cleaned up URL parser not to modify const buffer
There is no need to use '\0' termination here in string parsing,
so we may as well clean this up to follow the const declaration.
2010-10-17 20:12:54 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
75779589e8 WPS: Drop subscription if it does not have any valid callback address 2010-10-17 20:11:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d0ebf3285f WPS: Remove unused error path code 2010-10-17 20:10:09 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
acd0ef4d3c WPS UPnP: Fix HTTP client timeout event code
The define here was overriding the event code enum value and that
resulted in incorrect code being used and WPS UPnP code ignoring the
timeout events.
2010-10-17 20:07:33 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0e8da74e22 Fix build with drivers that use driver_wext.c
If CONFIG_DRIVER_WEXT=y is not used in .config, but driver_wext.c
gets pull in to help another driver wrapper, rfkill code needs to
included to fix the build.
2010-10-15 22:11:33 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
33c5deb816 nl80211: Indicate channel list change events
Listen to regulatory event messages from kernel and convert them to
internal driver event notifications indicated that the channel list
may have changed.
2010-10-15 18:56:36 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b5c9da8db3 P2P: Add mechanism for updating P2P channel list based on driver events
This allows P2P channel list to be updated whenever the driver changes
its list of allowed channels, e.g., based on country code from scan
results.
2010-10-15 18:55:22 +03:00
Anil Gathala Sudha
a0dee79709 P2P: Send AP mode WPS-FAIL event to parent interface
The AP operation with wpa_supplicant requires an additional callback
to get the needed event information from hostapd side so that
wpa_msg() can be called for wpa_s->parent if needed.
2010-10-14 20:57:00 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fc215bfe86 WPS: Add WPS-FAIL ctrl_interface event for hostapd 2010-10-14 20:50:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
81611b95ff WPS: Add Config Error into WPS-FAIL events
This makes it easier to figure out what could have failed in the
WPS protocol and potentially provide more information for the
user on how to resolve the issue.
2010-10-14 20:49:54 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d054a4622c P2P: Reject multi-channel concurrent operations depending on driver
The driver wrapper can now indicate whether the driver supports
concurrent operations on multiple channels (e.g., infra STA connection
on 5 GHz channel 36 and P2P group on 2.4 GHz channel 1). If not,
P2P_CONNECT commands will be rejected if they would require
multi-channel concurrency.

The new failure codes for P2P_CONNECT:

FAIL-CHANNEL-UNAVAILABLE:
The requested/needed channel is not currently available (i.e., user has
an option of disconnecting another interface to make the channel
available).

FAIL-CHANNEL-UNSUPPORTED:
The request channel is not available for P2P.
2010-10-14 14:24:56 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7861cb08c9 P2P: Share code for p2p_connect/authorize channel preparation 2010-10-14 12:45:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1e19f73495 P2P: Verify that p2p_connect forced frequency is allowed for P2P
Do not accept forced frequency unless the specified channel is
allowed for P2P, i.e., is included in the local list of
advertised channels.
2010-10-14 12:42:17 +03:00
Paul Stewart
7ee35bf395 nl80211: Add more details into signal change events
Add new survey retrieval function and add txrate to station into the
EVENT_SIGNAL_CHANGE events.
2010-10-12 20:01:50 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
68d6fe5693 WPS: Workaround broken Credential encoding from some D-Link APs
At least D-Link DIR-600 and DIR-825 have been reported to include
an extra octet after the Network Key attribute within a Credential
attribute. This can happen at least when they are provisioning an
open network.

Add a workaround to detect this incorrectly encoded attribute and
to skip the extra octet when parsing such a Credential.
2010-10-11 16:07:49 +03:00
Johannes Berg
5582a5d1b3 nl80211: Use nl80211 for Probe Request/Response frames
The new nl80211 API means we don't need to use monitor interfaces. This
means that the P2P implementation now requires a kernel that has support
for generic management frame (not just Action frame) transmission.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-10-10 18:10:37 +03:00
Johannes Berg
9884f9cc1c nl80211: Refactor Action frame TX
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-10-10 18:00:25 +03:00
Johannes Berg
bd94971e11 nl80211: Use new frame registration API
This is backward compatible since older kernels will ignore the extra
attribute and only allow registration for Action frames.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-10-10 17:55:18 +03:00
Johannes Berg
6ee04cfcf4 nl80211: support intra-BSS configuration
Using the AP_ISOLATE nl80211 option, we can support intra-BSS
distribution configuration.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-10-10 17:48:54 +03:00
Johannes Berg
a65a9aed7e nl80211: work around libnl bug
libnl has a bug, when binding more than two sockets and releasing one,
it will release the wrong address and then try to reuse it, which fails.
Therefore, we need to reimplement the socket address assignment logic
locally for libnl 1.1.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-10-10 17:47:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4e698e5c30 WPS: Fix WPS commands in wpa_supplicant AP mode
Commit 9290cc1800 broke this by moving
to use for_each_interface() which is not available in wpa_supplicant
AP mode.
2010-10-10 17:43:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ca0d6b81d6 P2P: Fix a typo to fix CONFIG_P2P=y build
Previous typo fix was missed here.
2010-10-10 17:28:47 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
257a515295 nl80211: Sync with wireless-testing.git 2010-10-09 11:57:05 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c3fc47ea8e EAP server: Allow reauth to be started with passthrough
Some sequencies of EAPOL logoff/logon/start messages seem to be
able to get the previous implementation into state where hostapd
would not be able to start reauthentication when external
authentication server is used. The EAP server code would bypass
the initial Identity Request generation and EAPOL code would not
be able to send anything to the authentication server or supplicant
at that point. Work around this by forcing EAP server code to
start with Identity Request after INITIALIZE state even if the
Identity is known.
2010-10-09 08:53:45 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
dce044cce5 P2P: Extend P2P manager functionality to work with driver MLME
Add P2P IE into Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Request
frames for drivers that generate this frames internally.
2010-10-08 18:16:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b74c19faf5 P2P: Fix a typo in P2P manager definition 2010-10-08 18:15:38 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2f7d9f2dd9 Apply WPS configuration changes to all interfaces that use WPS
When a single hostapd process is controlling multiple interfaces,
apply the received or auto-generated configuration changes to all
interfaces that have enabled WPS.
2010-10-08 17:32:10 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e55f98f4b8 Disable AP PIN on all interfaces controlled by the same process
When a single hostapd process is used to manage multiple interfaces,
disable AP PIN on all interfaces if an attack is detected on any
interface.
2010-10-08 17:24:58 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9290cc1800 Apply hostapd WPS commands to all interfaces on concurrent APs
When the same hostapd process is controlling multiple interfaces,
apply WPS commands (push button, add PIN, change AP PIN) to all
interfaces that are configured to use WPS.
2010-10-08 17:15:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
bf0ed63f3f Allow a postfix to be defined for the version number
A separate build number (etc.) version number postfix can now be
added to the build without having to modify source code files by
defining VERSION_STR_POSTFIX. This can be done, e.g., by adding
following line to .config:

CFLAGS += -DVERSION_STR_POSTFIX=\"-foo\"
2010-10-07 10:51:04 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0314e26a61 Fix wpa_supplicant AP mode with WPS not to crash
Commit 3379a3a795 added a direct
iface->for_each_interface use without verification whether the
function is available. This works with hostapd, but not
wpa_supplicant (which crashes on segfault).
2010-10-06 16:46:43 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
416192628d Fix AP mode 40 MHz pri/sec channel parsing in overlap determination
The previous implementation ended up incorrectly assuming that all
40 MHz use cases have secondary channel above the primary one. Fix this
by properly masking the secondary channel offset field and checking its
value.
2010-10-06 14:09:44 +03:00
David A Benjamin
32f4e7b124 wext: Fix scan result signal levels when driver reports in dBm
wpa_supplicant showed signal levels incorrectly with some drivers:
Jun  6 16:29:36 rupert wpa_supplicant[18945]: Current BSS: 00:0d:97:11:40:d6
level=190
Jun  6 16:29:36 rupert wpa_supplicant[18945]: Selected BSS: 00:0d:97:11:50:09
level=192

Judging from output from other tools (iwlist) and the min_diff block
at the end of wpa_supplicant_need_to_roam, it seems these values
should actually be negative. Specifically, if one treats that number
as a signed char instead of unsigned, everything matches up.

To be honest, I've little to no understanding of wireless, but looking
at the source code for wireless-tools (iw_print_stats in iwlib.c), it
seems that the fields of the iw_quality struct need to be decoded
differently depending on various flags. I guess
src/drivers/driver_wext.c should have similar logic in
wext_get_scan_qual.

I wrote a patch that attempts to replicate some of that logic,
although it may be more complicated than is necessary; I think some of
the complexity is for backwards-compatibility, which might not be
necessary depending on wpa_supplicant's dependencies? In any case, it
is attached. Again, I don't know how any of this works, so it's likely
the patch is a bit off. But I think at least the logic to determine
min_diff in wpa_supplicant_need_to_roam would be more accurate if
level were determined correctly.
2010-10-04 08:25:00 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8602b0f213 nl80211: Include linux/rtnetlink.h explicitly
This is needed with libnl-tiny to get various definitions that
get included implicitly with libnl.
2010-09-29 21:52:51 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
7598389afe nl80211: Sync the header file with wireless-testing.git 2010-09-29 21:39:40 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
12970f8a57 atheros: Prefer WSC IE in (Re)Association Request frame
This is needed to work properly with WPS stations that may include
both WPA/RSN IE and WSC IE when associating for WPS provisioning.
2010-09-24 17:01:03 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6d1031b971 WPS ER: Add more debug info on initialization errors 2010-09-24 16:05:58 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
a9d69254e3 WPS ER: Make sure PIN timeout does not interrupt PBC operation
We need to clear the selected registrar timeout from wps_er_learn
when stopping the protocol run at M7 (previously, this was done only
when WSC_Done was being processed). In addition, we need to cancel
the timeout when a new PBC operation is started.
2010-09-23 14:45:55 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
fa37511fa7 WPS: Fix hostapd reconfig to update WPS UPnP string pointers
This is needed to update the pointers maintained within WPS code
to use the new configuration data instead of maintaining pointers
to the old configuration which will be freed. This fixes strings in
UPnP discovery after reconfig (they used to be random freed memory..).
2010-09-22 19:34:32 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
7d698c4ec7 WPS: Add more debug details for Credential building 2010-09-22 19:20:01 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
2d5e0d78e9 WPS ER: Fix debug message for protocol run done case
This is not a failure and should not be indicated as such in the
debug log.
2010-09-22 19:19:33 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
3237bfb1a3 WPS: Fix strict validation of encrypted data for WSC 2.0-only case
Need to figure out whether the message is from a WSC 2.0 -based
device based on the unencrypted attributes, not the contents of the
encrypted data since the Version2 subelement is only included in the
unencrypted area.
2010-09-22 19:17:13 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
70153d385c hostapd: Add virt/phy flag for Display/PushButton if needed (WPS 2.0)
This seems to be the easiest way of making sure the Config Methods
value is compliant with the WSC 2.0 specification without having
to modify the configuration file. However, this will only add the
virtual flag, so the configuration files should really be updated
to specify values that match the AP design.
2010-09-22 17:45:43 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
370cb2a9ce WPS: Making some parsing messages use excessive debug level
This makes it easier to read -dd debug logs in environments that
have multiple WPS or P2P devices.
2010-09-22 11:39:58 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
82fb18472e WPS: Fix strict validation of (Re)Association Response
This frame is supposed to include Response Type, not Request Type
attribute.
2010-09-22 11:13:18 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
0e2e565a44 WPS 2.0: Provide (Re)Association Response WPS IE to driver
WPS 2.0 mandates the AP to include WPS IE in (Re)Association Response
if the matching (Re)Association Request included WPS IE. Provide the
needed WPS IE information to the driver_ops API for drivers that
process association frames internally.

Note: This modifies the driver_ops API by adding a new argument to
set_ap_wps_ie().
2010-09-22 10:46:44 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
baf7081ccd WPS: Add MAC address to validation error message for Probe Request
This makes it easier to figure out which device is sending invalid
Probe Request frames.
2010-09-22 10:07:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b4e34f2fdf WPS: Make testing operations configurable at runtime
Instead of build time options (CONFIG_WPS_TESTING_EXTRA_CRED and
CONFIG_WPS_EXTENSIBILITY_TESTING), use a single build option
(CONFIG_WPS_TESTING) and runtime configuration of which testing
operations are enabled. This allows a single binary to be used
for various tests.

The runtime configuration can be done through control interface
with wpa_cli/hostapd_cli commands:
Enable extensibility tests:
set wps_version_number 0x57
Disable extensibility tests (WPS2 build):
set wps_version_number 0x20
Enable extra credential tests:
set wps_testing_dummy_cred 1
Disable extra credential tests:
set wps_testing_dummy_cred 0
2010-09-21 19:51:23 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ab98525399 WPS 2.0: Fix AuthorizedMACs check to accept wildcard address
We need to accept both our own address and the ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
as an indication of the AP having authorized us.
2010-09-21 19:36:44 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
252d7db297 P2P: Fill in default Config Methods in Invitation Request
If the peer is not authorized for GO Negotiation, wps_method is not
actually set. In that case, it is better to fill in our default
config methods rather than end up leaving the field to be zero.
2010-09-21 18:26:01 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
3379a3a795 WPS: Fix Beacon WPS IE on concurrent dualband AP in PBC mode
The Beacon frame must include UUID-E and RF Bands attributes when
in active PBC mode to allow stations to figure out that two BSSes in
PBC mode is not a PBC session overlap.
2010-09-20 15:32:29 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ff28ccafd5 WPS: Add BSSID to strict validation error messages
This makes it easier to figure out which AP is sending invalid
Beacon or Probe Response frames.
2010-09-20 14:54:22 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e0369e3664 WPS: Use same UUID in multi-interface case
When generating the UUID based on MAC address, share the same UUID
with all interfaces. This fixes a potential issue with concurrent
dualband APs where the UUID needs to be same for PBC to work properly.
2010-09-20 14:28:43 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e64e3d245e WPS: Fix CONFIG_WPS_OOB build
The Version2 attribute was previous changed to a subelement and
the OOB code was missed during the change.
2010-09-19 17:18:43 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
3d32c6517d EAP-pwd: Fix couple of memory leaks 2010-09-14 22:16:17 -10:00
Jouni Malinen
d52be1db76 EAP-pwd: Move bnctx into per-protocol instance structure
This avoids double frees of bnctx and related crashes.
2010-09-14 22:04:09 -10:00
Dan Harkins
df684d82ff EAP-pwd: Add support for EAP-pwd server and peer functionality
This adds an initial EAP-pwd (RFC 5931) implementation. For now,
this requires OpenSSL.
2010-09-14 21:51:40 -10:00
Sudhakar Swaminathan
0f66abd25b P2P: Add option for disabling intra BSS distribution
p2p_intra_bss configuration parameter can now be used to
disable/enable intra BSS distribution (bridging of frames between
the clients in a group).
2010-09-10 10:30:26 -07:00
Ardong Chen
2049af2bd5 P2P: Fix invitation_received callback to use NULL bssid (if not known)
Previously, the storage buffer for the Group BSSID was returned
regardless of whether it was included in the invitation or not.
2010-09-10 10:30:26 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e2197af1b2 P2P: Make sure parsed Device Name gets null terminated
If the msg->device_name buffer is filled from two different sources,
the copy from the P2P Device Info attribute needs to make sure that
the values gets null terminated to match the length of the correct
string should the other place use another string (which is not really
allowed by the spec, but could happen).
2010-09-10 10:30:26 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ae3e342108 P2P: Add peer timeout into group formation 15 second timeout
This adds some more time for WPS provisioning step in case the peer
takes long time to start group interface operations.
2010-09-10 10:30:25 -07:00
Ardong Chen
2f9929ffcc WPS: Allow pending WPS operation to be cancelled
A new ctrl_interface command, WPS_CANCEL, can now be used to cancel
a pending or ongoing WPS operation. For now, this is only available
with wpa_supplicant (either in station or AP mode). Similar
functionality should be added for hostapd, too.
2010-09-10 10:30:25 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
fbe7027239 P2P: Provide local event on GO Neg Req rejection
If an authorized (p2p_connect used locally) GO Negotiation is
rejected when receiving GO Negotiation Request from the peer,
indicate the failure with a ctrl_interface P2P-GO-NEG-FAILURE
event. Previously, this event was only shown on the peer (i.e.,
the device receiving the GO Negotiation Response with non-zero
Status code).
2010-09-10 10:30:25 -07:00
Ardong Chen
ffe98dfb88 P2P: Process Invitation Request from previously unknown peer
Since this message now includes P2P Device Info attribute, it is
reasonable to learn the peer data and process the message instead of
rejecting the message.
2010-09-10 10:30:25 -07:00
Ardong Chen
17bef1e97a P2P: Add peer entry based on Provision Discovery Request
Add (or complete Probe Request only) P2P peer entry when receiving
Provision Discovery Request from a previously unknown peer. This is
especially of use for a GO when a P2P client is requesting to join
a running group.
2010-09-10 10:30:25 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
812bf56ab1 Fix build without CONFIG_P2P=y 2010-09-09 07:20:28 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e9a7ae41fa P2P: Use SSID from GO Negotiation to limit WPS provisioning step
In order to avoid picking incorrect SSID from old scan results, use
SSID from GO Negotiation to select the AP.
2010-09-09 07:17:23 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
f8d0131a11 P2P: Use operating frequency from peer table as backup for join
The scan operation before Provision Discovery Request may not include
the GO. However, we are likely to have the GO in our P2P peer table,
so use that information to figure out the operating channel if BSS
table entry is not available.
2010-09-09 07:17:23 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
f7a6905735 P2P: Add a workaround for Extended Listen Timing getting stuck
This should not really happen, but it looks like the Listen command
may fail is something else (e.g., a scan) was running at an
inconvenient time. As a workaround, allow new Extended Listen
operation to be started if this state is detected.
2010-09-09 07:17:23 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6125c661d5 P2P: Fix cross connection allowed parser to use correct field
The previous version had a bug that could result in NULL pointer
dereference if the P2P IE included Manageability attribute, but no
Capability attribute.
2010-09-09 07:17:22 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
5548ddc217 P2P: Allow P2P IE without Device Info in (Re)Assoc Req
This can happen, e.g., when a P2P client connects to a P2P group
using the infrastructure WLAN interface instead of P2P group
interface. In that case, the P2P client may behave as if the GO
would be a P2P Manager WLAN AP.
2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b6c79a998f Add test command for disabling/enabling A-MPDU aggregation
ctrl_iface command "SET ampdu <0/1>" can now be used to
disable/enable A-MPDU aggregation.
2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
0cc8be3e45 P2P: Fix code order to avoid potential NULL pointer dereference 2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
c4ea4c5c90 P2P: Allow driver wrapper to indicate how many stations are supported
This can be used to limit the number of clients allowed to connect
to the group on the GO.
2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
eea2fd9eff P2P: Add mechanism for configuring UAPSD parameters for group
This is needed to be able to change parameters for dynamically
created interfaces between the creation of the interface and
association/start AP commands.

Following ctrl_interface commands can now be used:

P2P_SET client_apsd disable
- disable configuration (i.e., use driver default) in client mode

P2P_SET client_apsd <BE>,<BK>,<VI>,<VO>;<max SP Length>
- enable UASPD with specific trigger configuration (0/1) per AC
  (max SP Length is currently ignored)

P2P_SET go_apsd disable
- disable configuration (i.e., use driver default) in AP mode

P2P_SET go_apsd <0/1>
- disable/enable APSD in AP mode
2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
2f837b41dc P2P: Fix build after WSC 2.0 change to use WFA vendor extension 2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
2d509b39b1 WPS: Fix ER PBC overlap detection build with P2P changes 2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
5ded7d3eb8 P2P: Fix GAS fragmentation to match with IEEE 802.11u
P2P specification v1.15 fixed the description of the GAS fragmentation
to not duplicate NQP Query Response Field header in all fragments. This
change makes the fragmentation match with the description in IEEE
802.11u. The change is not backwards compatible with previous P2P
specification versions as far as fragmented SD responses are concerned.
2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
3dfda83d9c P2P: Add Device Password ID to GO Neg Request RX event
This event indicates the Device Password ID that the peer tried
to use in GO Negotiation. For example:
P2P-GO-NEG-REQUEST 02:40:61:c2:f3:b7 dev_passwd_id=4
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
4147a2cc64 P2P: Fix p2p_connect join with interface address
Need to fetch P2P Device Address from the peers table in case the
p2p_connect join command uses interface address.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
72044390f3 P2P: Add support for cross connection
If enabled, cross connection allows GO to forward IPv4 packets
using masquerading NAT from the P2P clients in the group to an
uplink WLAN connection. This is disabled by default and can be
enabled with "wpa_cli p2p_set cross_connect 1" on the P2P device
interface.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6c6915f3db P2P: Add defined values for P2P Manageability Bitmap 2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
0af196088c P2P: Fix device discoverability to not wait before sending GO Neg Req
When we receive Device Discoverability Response, we need to initiate
new GO Negotiation as quickly as possible to avoid the target client
from going back to sleep. Make sure we do not end up in
P2P_CONNECT_LISTEN state (short Listen mode) in this case.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
aefb53bd5d P2P: Disable periodic NoA when non-P2P STA is connected
For now, this applies to the test command that can be used to set
periodic NoA (p2p_set noa). The value are stored and periodic NoA
is enabled whenever there are no non-P2P STAs connected to the GO.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
4c08c0bd57 P2P: Include P2P IE in (Re)AssocReq to infra AP if it uses P2P IE
While this is not strictly speaking required by the P2P specification
for a not-P2P Managed Device, this can provide useful information for
the P2P manager AP and may be needed to pass certification tests.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
5be5305b7e P2P: Include Extended Listen Timing attribute in (Re)AssocReq
If extended listen timing is enabled, it should be advertised in
(Re)Association Request frames sent to GOs.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
04d8dad5c7 P2P: Wait on operating channel between invitation requests
If running in active GO mode to invite a device to join the group,
wait on operating channel instead of listen channel.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
d9d6a58c8f P2P: Fix invitation to active group to use correct operating channel
Invitation Request must use the current operating frequency of the
group, not the default operating channel.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
48e4377093 P2P: Fix WSC IE not to include two Device Name attrs with WPS 2.0 is used 2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
d5b20a73b2 P2P: Fix channel forcing for p2p_connect auth 2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
18eff3a3a7 P2P: Use 0-timeout when inviting to running group as client 2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
952f119242 P2P: Add Device Info attribute to Invitation Request
This was added as a mandatory attribute in one of the recent spec
updates.
2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
55a625799f P2P: Add Group Info attr into Probe Response in GO without clients
While there is no real value in this, the spec seems to mark this
attribute as mandatory from GO, so better included it regardless
of whether we have clients or not (the attribute is empty in case
no clients are connected).
2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
80c9582a5f P2P: Add test command for filtering which peers are discovered
"wpa_cli p2p_set peer_filter <MAC address>" can now be used to
only allow a single P2P Device (based on P2P Device Address) to be
discovered for testing. Setting the address to 00:00:00:00:00:00
disables the filter.
2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
9e00ea1aa3 P2P: Fix country string mismatch validation off-by-one offset
0x04 was being checked from incorrect location when skipping country
code validation.
2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
18708aadfc P2P: Initial support for SD fragmentation (GAS Comeback Request/Response) 2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
bf608cad56 P2P: Rename SD info not available define to match with spec change 2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
3c5126a41f P2P: Set Device Password ID in WPS M1/M2 per new rules
If the P2P client (WPS Enrollee) uses a PIN from the GO (Registrar),
Device Password ID in M1 & M2 is set to Registrar-specified.
2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
c381508d88 P2P: Implement power save configuration
wpa_cli p2p_set ps <0/1/2>
wpa_cli p2p_set oppps <0/1>
wpa_cli p2p_set ctwindow <0..> msec
2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
40c03fd40b P2P: Handle p2p_scan tracking in SEARCH state
Previously, only the initial p2p_scan was used to delay starting new
P2P operations. However, this should have applied to the SEARCH state
scans, too.
2010-09-09 07:17:18 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
962473c136 P2P: Add preliminary P2P Manager AP support for hostapd 2010-09-09 07:17:18 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ef7963917c P2P: Add group notification from (re)association request 2010-09-09 07:17:18 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
f684e608af P2P: Use PSK format in WPS Credential 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
8ccbe415ba P2P: Add group notifications 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e44f8bf20a P2P: Add P2P configuration and callbacks in hostapd code 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b22128efdc P2P: Add initial version of P2P Module 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
c2af2afb3b P2P: Preparations for adding P2P IE into Beacon/Probe Response frames 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b305c684b8 P2P: Save a copy of P2P IE(s) data from (Re)Association Request 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
046b26a24e nl80211: Add P2P operations 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
2883205ec8 driver_test: Add functionality for allowing P2P testing 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
75bde05d53 P2P: Add driver operations for P2P use 2010-09-09 07:17:16 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
62281bc690 P2P: Do no process Probe Request with P2P wildcard SSID in WPS
The Probe Request frames used in P2P Device Discovery should not be
processed by the WPS implementation.
2010-09-09 07:17:16 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
935a948f97 P2P: Enable use of WPS Requested Device Type without WPS 2.0 2010-09-09 07:17:16 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
63675def6e P2P: Add Device Name into WPS IE in Probe Request frames 2010-09-09 07:17:16 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
91a9464528 Make IEEE 802.11 IE parser aware of P2P IE
This does not handle fragmented IEs and is only used to check quickly
whether the IE blob includes any P2P IE(s).
2010-09-09 07:17:16 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
dd6cc5a20c P2P: Wi-Fi Direct frame format definitions 2010-09-09 07:17:16 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
fdc9eeb175 WPS 2.0: Convert new attributes into WFA vendor extension
The WSC 2.0 specification moved to use another design for the new
attributes to avoid backwards compatibility issues with some
deployed implementations.
2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ac4dcaf7bf WPS 2.0: Fix strict mode validation of UPnP MAC Address format
This was supposed to only reject the message from WPS 2.0 ER, not from
WPS 1.0 ER.
2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
42f50264c0 WPS: Make fragment size configurable for EAP-WSC peer
"wpa_cli set wps_fragment_size <val>" can now be used to configure the
fragment size limit for EAP-WSC.
2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ecece754db WPS: Add more debug prints for authorized MACs operations 2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
498cdee0c7 WPS ER: Use PBC overlap detection
ER should follow same rules as internal Registrar in an AP for
session overlap detection.
2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6a4477236e WPS 2.0: Only reject Probe Request frames from WPS 2.0 devices 2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e69b86b71d WPS 2.0: By default, use strict validation reject only with WPS 2.0 2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
5fabd9fefb WPS: Fix strict validation to mandate Network Index attribute
While this attribute is is now deprecated, it is still required
for backwards compatibility. Better check this if strict validation
is enabled.
2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e6e25d37a3 WPS 2.0: Use strict validation of NewWLANEventMAC only with WPS 2.0
This avoids some testing issues with WPS 1.0 implementations while
maintaining strict validation for WPS 2.0 implementations.
2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b68ccf4048 WPS ER: Do not use SetSelectedRegistrar when learning/configuring AP 2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ad4741183f WPS 2.0: Make sure PHY/VIRT flag gets set for PBC 2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
168f840169 WPS 2.0: Add strict validation of SetSelectedRegistrar attributes 2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
545ee4fd3d WPS 2.0: Add wildcard AuthorizedMACs if Enrollee address is not known 2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
53587ec183 WPS 2.0: Make WSC 2.0 support to be build option (CONFIG_WPS2)
For now, the default build will only include WSC 1.0 support.
CONFIG_WPS2=y can be used to add support for WSC 2.0.
2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
c15a854aec WPS 2.0: Add tool for testing protocol extensibility
This is disabled by default and can be enabled by defining
CONFIG_WPS_EXTENSIBILITY_TESTING.
2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
4a34969824 WPS: Add a test mechanism for adding an extra credential into M8
This can be used to build a test version of ER that adds an extra
Credential attribute into M8.
2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
54f489be45 WPS 2.0: Validate WPS attributes in management frames and WSC messages
If CONFIG_WPS_STRICT is set, validate WPS IE(s) in management frames and
reject the frames if any of the mandatory attributes is missing or if an
included attribute uses an invalid value. In addition, verify that all
mandatory attributes are included and have valid values in the WSC
messages.
2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
00ae50bc87 atheros: Use larger buffer for WSC IE changes
This resolves issues in updating Beacon/Probe Response frame IEs
in a case where the value may be long enough to get fragmented
into multiple IEs.
2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ed1c1ebfb4 WPS 2.0: Ignore WEP Credentials as station Enrollee
Ignore Credential if it is for a WEP network. Reject the message if
no valid Credential is found.
2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6be2d7f826 WPS 2.0: Enforce new security policy of received AP Settings
When receiving new AP Settings from ER, reject WEP configuration
and upgrade WPA-Personal/TKIP only to mixed mode (i.e., add
WPA2-Personal/CCMP).
2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6b633b4da7 WPS 2.0: Fix Probe Request WPS IE building to be able to fragment data
If all the device information attributes use their maximum lengths,
a single WPS IE is not enough to fit in all the data and as such,
we must be able to fragment the data. In addition, the wpabuf needs
to be allocated larger to fit in maximum data.
2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
dcc4d8be75 WPS 2.0: Disable WPS workarounds if CONFIG_WPS_STRICT is defined 2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
5314d652d4 WPS 2.0: Modify empty-string workaround to meet 2.0 rules
Instead of using 0x00 as the extra character, use space (' ') to
avoid failing tests that verify that the variable length string
attributes are not null terminated. In addition, this workaround
can now be disabled by defining CONFIG_WPS_STRICT for the build.
This can be done by adding following line to .config:
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_WPS_STRICT

However, it should be noted that such a build may not interoperate
with some deployed WPS 1.0 -based implementations and as such, is
mainly designed for testing.
2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6a857074f4 WPS 2.0: Add virtual/physical display and pushbutton config methods 2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
662bd57522 WPS 2.0: Add device attributes into Probe Request
Add Manufacturer, Model Name, Model Number, and Device Name attributes
into the WSC IE in the Probe Request frames.
2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
cfe1c3f1ef WPS 2.0: Add Request to Enroll attribute into Probe Request
Whenever wpa_supplication is using Request Type Enrollee, it is trying
to enroll into a network. Indicate this with the explicit inclusion of
Request to Enroll attribute with value TRUE.
2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
31fcea931d WPS 2.0: Add support for AuthorizedMACs attribute
Advertize list of authorized enrollee MAC addresses in Beacon and
Probe Response frames and use these when selecting the AP. In order
to provide the list, the enrollee MAC address should be specified
whenever adding a new PIN. In addition, add UUID-R into
SetSelectedRegistrar action to make it potentially easier for an AP
to figure out which ER sent the action should there be multiple ERs
using the same IP address.
2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
f439079e93 WPS 2.0: Add new attributes and update version negotiation
This adds definitions and parsing of the new attributes that were added
in WPS 2.0. In addition, the version negotiation is updated to use the
new mechanism, i.e., accept everything received and use the new Version2
attribute in transmitted messages.
2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
a0fad21014 Indicate Barker Preamble Mode in ERP IE also based on local configuration
While this is not strictly speaking required based on dynamic
configuration (i.e., dot11ShortPreambleOptionImplemented is static
value based on implementation, not runtime configuration), it is better
to follow local configuration parameter for short preamble in addition
to the associated station capabilities.
2010-09-05 13:11:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
702934a163 atheros: Fix driver deinit function to be run
hostapd uses hapd_deinit(), not deinit() wpa_driver_ops.
2010-09-05 13:04:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4a46e82fb4 atheros: Deinit l2_packet sock_xmit on error path 2010-09-05 13:03:26 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8421e95c71 Fix segfault in hostapd_eid_ht_capabilities() with some drivers
This function is not really needed in case of drivers that build the
HT IEs internally. However, since this can get called if ieee80211n=1
is set in hostapd.conf, we better not segfault even if the driver
does not provide hw info (hapd->iface->current_mode == NULL).
2010-09-05 12:47:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0caf077bc1 WPS: Fix hostapd build without CONFIG_WPS_UPNP
Commit 5a1cc30f1a added code that was
assuming CONFIG_WPS_UPNP is enabled whenever CONFIG_WPS is. Fix this
by making the UPnP calls conditional on CONFIG_WPS_UPNP define.
2010-09-05 12:34:04 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
cce1f698e5 WPS: Use more defensive design to avoid theoretical NULL deref
Prior to commit 6195adda9b the sm->user
dereference did not exist here. While this is in practice non-NULL,
better use more defensive construction here to avoid NULL pointer
dereference should this ever change.
2010-09-04 21:37:36 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0c80427d77 NDIS: Fix association for WPS provisioning with protected AP
Some NDIS drivers require a workaround to allow them to associate
with a WPS AP that is already using protection (Privacy field = 1).
Let driver_ndis.c know if the AP is already using Privacy and if so,
configure a dummy WEP key to force the driver to associate.
2010-09-04 13:56:12 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f4e5fd948a l2_packet_ndis: Fix overlapped write not to corrupt stack
When using overlapped write, we must have the provided memory
areas available during the operation and cannot just use stack
unless we wait for the completion within the function. In the case
of TX here, we can easily wait for the completion since it is likely
to happen immediately. In addition, this provides more reliable
success/failure return value for l2_packet_send(). [Bug 328]
2010-09-02 13:23:14 +03:00
Helmut Schaa
36af1c7d31 hostapd: enable STBC only for STBC capable STAs
hostapd simply used its own STBC configuration in the STA's HT caps. This
resulted in TX STBC being used for STAs not supporting RX STBC, which in
turn resulted in the STA not receiving anything.

Fix this by handling the STBC flags in the same way mac80211 does. Mask
out RX STBC if we don't support TX STBC and vice versa.

Tested only with the nl80211 driver and a STBC incapable STA.

Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2010-08-28 12:25:44 +03:00
Masashi Honma
60da5e0f3f Solaris: Add support for wired IEEE 802.1X client
This patch adds support for wired IEEE 802.1X client on the Solaris.

I have tested with these:
OS : OpenSolaris 2009.06
EAP : EAP-MD5
Switch : Cisco Catalyst 2950
2010-08-28 11:40:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
60a972a68d Add current signal strength into signal quality change events 2010-08-27 16:58:06 +03:00
Masashi Honma
9c77ad1889 trace: Fix void pointer arithmetic
The arithmetic on void pointer exists in trace routine. On GNU C, it
works because void pointer size is 1, but not all compilers behave like
this. So this patch specifies the size of the pointer.
2010-08-26 18:35:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
31fa4c6d98 Remove unused ieee802_11_send_deauth() 2010-08-25 21:18:54 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ef546700e2 WPS: Optimize M2 processing in AP Setup Locked case
There is no need to process the public key and generate keys if
the AP is going to reject this M2 anyway. This limits effect of
potential CPU DoS attacks in cases where AP PIN is disabled.
2010-08-24 16:42:26 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5a1cc30f1a WPS: Add support for dynamic AP PIN management
A new hostapd_cli command, wps_ap_pin, can now be used to manage
AP PIN at runtime. This can be used to generate a random AP PIN and
to only enable the AP PIN for short period (e.g., based on user
action on the AP device). Use of random AP PIN that is only enabled
for short duration is highly recommended to avoid security issues
with a static AP PIN.
2010-08-24 16:35:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
944814106e WPS: Do not disable AP PIN permanently, only slow down attacks
As a compromise between usability and security, do not disable
AP PIN permanently based on failed PIN validations. Instead, go to
AP Setup Locked state for increasing amount of time between each
failure to slow down brute force attacks against the AP PIN.

This avoids problems with some external Registrars that may try
to use the same PIN multiple times without user input. Now, the
user will still be able to fix the PIN and try again later while
a real attack is delayed enough to make it impractical.
2010-08-24 15:24:05 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
035cc69d98 WPS: Use WSC_NACK if no device password is known on M2 RX
This can happen on the AP if the AP PIN is not configured and
the client tries to go through the protocol instead of just using
Registrar mode to receive M1 from the AP. It is cleaner to send
out the WSC_NACK instead of just stopping the protocol.
2010-08-24 12:56:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8cbd92ee29 EAP-FAST server: Add I-ID into PAC-Info
This indicates that the peer identity is associated with the
credential and will be required to match with the identity used
during authentication when the PAC is used (RFC 5422, 4.2.4).
2010-08-19 21:16:19 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2e75a2b3a6 Add more debug info on deauth/disassoc events and commands 2010-08-17 21:04:38 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
43dd46b3bc Fix memory leak in AP WEP key configuration 2010-08-17 21:04:07 +03:00
Samuel Ortiz
cb1583f64b sme: Try all authentication algorithms when the first one fails
When passing several authentication algorithms through auth_alg, we
should try all of them when the first one fails. The wext driver goes
through the connect nl80211 command and the retries are then handled by
the kernel. The nl80211 doesn't and we have to handle that from
userspace.

Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com>
2010-08-17 16:39:33 +03:00
Paul Stewart
cb30b297bd nl80211: Ignore "DEAUTH" messages from APs we are not associated to
DEAUTH messages can come from a number of different sources. The one
that's hurting us currently is DEAUTH netlink messages coming to us
from compat-wireless in response to local_state_change DEAUTH messages
we sent as a part of cleaning up state in driver_nl80211's
clear_state_mismatch() function. However, DEAUTH messages can come
from a variety of unwanted sources, including directed denial-of-service
attacks (although MAC verification doesn't place that high a barrier),
so this validation is actually generically useful, I think.

The downside to this method is that without a kernel based approach
"iw dev wlan0 link" no longer works correctly after clear_state_mismatch()
is done.  This will be pursued with the kernel folks.
2010-08-16 21:27:26 +03:00
Daniel Gryniewicz
6c78ae1443 Fix RSN preauth candidate list clearing to avoid segfaults
Commit c5b26e33c1 broke the processing
of the candidate list entries when an old entry was either removed or
reused. The entry needs to be removed from the list to avoid leaving
pointers to freed memory.

http://bugs.gentoo.org/show_bug.cgi?id=330085
http://w1.fi/bugz/show_bug.cgi?id=372
2010-08-14 19:01:14 +03:00
Johannes Berg
ba2d0d7d68 nl80211: Don't pass ctx to wpa_driver_nl80211_init_nl
Currently, we don't use the sock_ctx that we get passed by eloop, so
don't assign it.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-08-11 18:33:24 +03:00
Johannes Berg
f48ffe4364 nl80211: Remove unused pending_send_action
This variable is assigned only once and never tested, so basically
unused.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-08-11 18:33:02 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
92afbe9d63 WPS: Make DH debug prints easier to understand 2010-08-11 18:02:39 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
15ed5535ad nl80211: Show remain-on-channel duration in debug output 2010-08-11 18:02:19 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
26af9dcaef nl80211: Try mode changes multiple times to avoid some races
cfg80211/mac80211 seems to be unwilling to change interface mode in
some cases. Make these less likely to cause problems by trying the
changes up to 10 times with 100 msec intervals.
2010-08-11 18:01:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6195adda9b WPS: Allow AP to start in Enrollee mode without AP PIN for probing
In theory, this should not really be needed, but Windows 7 uses
Registrar mode to probe AP's WPS capabilities before trying to use
Enrollee and fails if the AP does not allow that probing to happen.
This allows the AP to start as an Enrollee and send M1, but refuse
to continue beyond that (M3 will not be sent if AP PIN is not known).
2010-07-26 18:12:08 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
67ccef7e6c FT: Send RRB data directly when managed by same hostapd process
This makes it easier (and a bit faster) to handle multiple local
radios with FT. There is no need to depend on l2_packet in that
case since the frame can be delivered as a direct function call.
2010-07-25 20:30:12 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
08b19cb404 WPS: Limit WPS ER event_id < 2^31 bits to avoid issues with atoi()
Previously, large event_id values (> 2^31) resulted in integer
overflow that would make ER drop all events from the AP.
2010-07-20 22:56:58 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
7f6ec672ea EAP server: Add support for configuring fragment size 2010-07-20 22:56:10 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
f3a3e6987e WPS: Allow fragment size to be configured 2010-07-20 22:55:39 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
4e22adb4d1 WPS: Move from WLAN_STA_MAYBE_WPS to WLAN_STA_WPS based on EAP messages
If the station does not include WSC IE in Association Request, it
is marked with WLAN_STA_MAYBE_WPS flag. We can update that to
WLAN_STA_WPS if the station uses either of the WPS identity strings.
This enables some workarounds for WPS stations.
2010-07-18 16:10:08 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
9301f6515e WPS: Reduce client timeout with EAP-WSC to avoid long wait
This works around issues with EAP-Failure getting lost for some reason.
Instead of waiting up to 60 seconds on a timeout, 30 second timeout is
now used and whenever the provisioning step has been completed (either
successfully or unsuccessfully), this timeout is reduced to 2 seconds.
2010-07-18 16:09:30 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
3239706303 WPS: Force disconnection after provisioning step
This works around some problems where the station is unable to disconnect
for some reason (e.g., if EAP-Failure gets dropped).
2010-07-18 16:08:52 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
c01106f3e8 WPS: Add more debug info for DH keys 2010-07-17 20:23:55 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b3b2da770e Define Public Action and Vendor-specific Public Action frames 2010-07-17 20:22:40 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
950388f745 IEEE 802.11u GAS defines 2010-07-17 20:21:39 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
4796272f5f nl80211: show TX status (ack) in debug log 2010-07-17 20:17:43 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e9501a07c6 FT: Fix RRB messages to use correct endianness
The pairwise cipher field is supposed to be little endian, but the
message building functions did not swap the bytes on big endian
hosts while the message processing functions did. Fix this by using
little endian byte order in both places.
2010-07-17 17:48:32 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
2f1ce78bf7 WPS: Add a workaround for OS X 10.6.3 and .4 (use PSK, not passphrase)
It looks like 10.6.3 and 10.6.4 do not like to receive Network Key
with WPA passphrase while PSK format still works. Use peer information
from M1 to figure out whether the Enrollee is likely to be OS X and
if so, force PSK format to be used for Network Key.
2010-07-05 15:37:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
612e9160e2 WPS: Add a workaround for parsing M1 from OS X 10.6
It looks like Mac OS X adds unexpected 0x00 padding to the end of M1.
Skip that padding to avoid interop issues.
2010-07-05 13:04:54 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
2d8bf73298 Add new debug message level for excessive information
Some frequent debug prints are of limited use and make debug output
difficult to read. Make them use a new debug level so that -dd
provides more readable output (-ddd can now be used to enable
the excessive debug prints).
2010-07-05 12:21:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
cc91e07e57 OpenSSL: Fix public key length in DH group 5 operations
The length of the prime was used incorrectly and this resulted
in WPS DH operation failing whenever the public key ended up having
leading zeros (i.e., about every 1/256th time).
2010-06-26 21:03:25 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
41e650ae5c WPS: Use different scan result sorting rules when doing WPS provisioning
The AP configuration may change after provisioning, so it is better
not to use the current security policy to prioritize results. Instead,
use WPS Selected Registrar attribute as the main sorting key and use
signal strength next without considering security policy or rate sets.
The non-WPS provisioning case remains as-is, i.e., this change applies
only when trying to find an AP for WPS provisioning.
2010-06-11 13:50:13 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
9abe9b2c35 WPS: Add workaround for missing Network Key attribute
Some deployed implementations do not include the mandatory Network
Key attribute when a WPS Credential is for an open network. Allow
this to improve interoperability since the actual key value is not
really needed for open networks.
2010-06-11 11:29:10 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
9776475fb9 WPS: Do not proxy Probe Request frames to foreign SSIDs to Registrars
We must only indicate stations that are either probing the wildcard SSID
or our own SSID.
2010-06-10 22:36:34 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
a63063b4f6 rfkill: Use rtnetlink ifup/ifdown events
Replace use of rfkill block event with rtnetlink ifdown. This makes
the design more robust since the rfkill event could have been for
another interface while the rtnetlink events are already filtered
based of ifindex. In addition, the new design handles other than
rfkill-triggered ifdown/ifup events, too. rfkill unblocked event
is still needed to try to set the interface back up. If the unblock
was for another interface, ifup will fail and the driver state is
not changed.
2010-05-31 18:52:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
84b2f9909f Fix driver operation order in configuration reloading
Some of the driver wrappers need to get set_ieee8021x() call before
they can configure keys. Reorder the operations in the reloading
of configuration case to match with that expectation.
2010-05-29 22:27:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7f5957abcf eloop: Fix crash on signal handler cancelling next timeout
It is possible that the timeout pointer becomes invalid in one of the
signal handlers, so we need to reload the pointer after those.
2010-05-28 22:18:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8b0ea5a07e atheros: Fix WPA/802.1X disabling to clear Privacy flag
Setting IEEE80211_PARAM_AUTHMODE to IEEE80211_AUTH_AUTO ends up enabling
Privacy mode in the driver. We need to clear that to allow hostapd to be
reconfigured into open mode.
2010-05-28 21:51:31 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7d6640a62c WPS ER: Add command for configuring an AP
wps_er_config can now be used to configure an AP. It is similar to
wps_er_learn, but instead of only learning the current AP settings,
it continues to send M8 with the new settings for the AP.
2010-05-28 00:01:48 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
15dbf1291a WPS ER: Add ctrl_iface event for learned AP settings 2010-05-27 15:24:45 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0848668513 WPS ER: Allow AP filtering based on IP address
wps_er_start command now takes an optional parameter that can be used
to configure a filter to only allow UPnP SSDP messages from the
specified IP address. In practice, this limits the WPS ER operations
to a single AP and filters out all other devices in the network.
2010-05-27 15:23:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
826fe5fec3 WPS ER: Fix Credential to use correct Enrollee MAC Address
When starting the protocol run with an Enrollee, clone the AP Settings
and replace the AP MAC Address with the Enrollee MAC Address so that the
correct value is then used in the Credential attribute in M8.
2010-05-27 15:22:44 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ed7a09f914 Add WPS IE into (Re)Association Response frame if WPS is used
If the associating station indicates that it is intents to use WPS
by including WPS IE in (Re)Association Request frame, include WPS IE
in (Re)Association Response frame.
2010-05-26 18:46:08 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
16e46ec043 Reassemble WPS IE(s) in (Re)Association Request if needed
Use a function that will take care of possible (though, very unlikely)
fragmentation of WPS TLVs in (Re)Association Request frames.
2010-05-26 18:17:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
99e437ad52 Fix WPS attribute parser to use correct pointer for Response Type 2010-05-26 17:12:30 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
32b752ef8f Internal TLS: Fix X.509 name handling to use sequency of attributes
There may be more than one attribute of same type (e.g., multiple DC
attributes), so the code needs to be able to handle that. Replace the
fixed structure with an array of attributes.
2010-05-25 20:55:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
969b403fa7 Internal TLS: Add domainComponent parser for X.509 names 2010-05-25 19:43:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5216938960 Fix memory leak on rfkill init error path 2010-05-25 12:06:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8c0ef18199 Fix a typo in unused attribute name 2010-05-25 09:57:22 +03:00
Masashi Honma
6db1602d5b bsd: Use set_freq() API for AP mode wpa_supplicant
Previous version driver_bsd.c switches the channel in
wpa_driver_bsd_associate(). This patch changes it to use set_freq().
I have tested this patch on FreeBSD 8.0/NetBSD 5.0.2 with hostapd,
wpa_supplicant(AP) and wpa_supplicant(STA).
2010-05-23 12:20:33 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8401a6b028 Add Linux rfkill support
Add a new wpa_supplicant state: interface disabled. This can be used
to allow wpa_supplicant to be running with the network interface even
when the driver does not actually allow any radio operations (e.g.,
due to rfkill).

Allow driver_nl80211.c and driver_wext.c to start while rfkill is in
blocked state (i.e., when ifconfig up fails) and process rfkill
events to block/unblock WLAN.
2010-05-23 10:27:32 +03:00
Andriy Tkachuk
6deb41e73f Update WPS IE on hostapd reconfiguration
This is needed to handle cases where WPS state may have changed and
hostapd is reloading its configuration.
2010-05-02 11:21:19 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1bc774a12a hostapd: Reorder some IEs to get closer to IEEE 802.11 standard
Vendor-specific IEs are supposed to be in the end of the frame, so move
WMM into the end of Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Response
frames. In addition, move HT IEs to be later in (Re)Association
Response to match the correct order.

hostapd_eid_wpa() adds multiple IEs and the end result may not always be
correct. If WPA is enabled, WPA IE (vendor-specific) gets added in the
middle of the frame and not in the end. This would require a larger
change to spliut the IEs from WPA module into separate locations when
constructing Beacon and Probe Response frames. This is not yet addressed.
2010-05-02 10:53:01 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b4a1256d36 Fix fallback from failed PMKSA caching into full EAP authentication
Commit 83935317a7 added forced
disconnection in case of 4-way handshake failures. However, it should
not have changed the case where the supplicant is requesting fallback
to full EAP authentication if the PMKID in EAPOL-Key message 1/4 is
not know. This case needs to send an EAPOL-Start frame instead of
EAPOL-Key message 2/4.

This works around a problem with APs that try to force PMKSA caching
even when the client does not include PMKID in (re)association request
frame to request it. [Bug 355]
2010-05-01 17:35:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
439d4bf960 Fix EAPOL_SM_USES_WPA flag to be set correctly
Commit c02d52b405 removed direct calls
to the WPA authenticator, but the change here was incorrect.
EAPOL_SM_USES_WPA was supposed to be set based on sta->wpa_sm being
set, i.e., no need to check for PMKSA entries for that.

While this could potentially change EAPOL Key TX state machine behavior,
no clear problems have been identified so far. Anyway, better fix this
to get the correct flags set for EAPOL authenticator state machine.
2010-05-01 17:12:59 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3ab72b626b Fix WPA state machine initialization on WPA_REAUTH if needed
When using WPS, we may end up here if the STA manages to re-associate
without the previous STA entry getting removed. Consequently, we need to
make sure that the WPA state machines gets initialized properly at this
point.
2010-04-23 16:49:50 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fb2ab5dd6a hostap.git is now 0.8.x development tree
0.7.x for branched into hostap-07.git for stable releases.
2010-04-18 21:01:00 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
be48214d2b Preparations for 0.7.2 release 2010-04-18 18:02:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e4cbe058d6 TNC: Add more debug infor to EAP-TNC server state changes 2010-04-18 12:24:02 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
11804a4ebc TNC: Fix EAP-TNC fragmentation of the last message
62477841a1 tried to address fragmentation
issues, but it did not address the case where the final EAP-TNC
message gets fragmented. Move the state update to the correct place
to address this case, too.
2010-04-18 12:21:56 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5febb0d272 TNCS: Fix uninit in error case to not double free IMVs 2010-04-18 11:10:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e0f412b927 atheros: Restore ATH_WPS_IE definition and comment 2010-04-17 21:47:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9b74812032 atheros: Add more robust and complete debug info for ioctl failures 2010-04-17 21:45:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a317d8520e atheros: Update to build with the current driver version 2010-04-17 21:04:26 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2de5a860a3 Fix build without CONFIG_FULL_DYNAMIC_VLAN 2010-04-17 21:01:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7992b07f6a Remove unnecessary SUBDIRS loops from src/*/Makefile
There are no subdirectories in any of these directories or plans
for adding ones. As such, there is no point in running the loop
that does not do anything and can cause problems with some shells.
2010-04-17 17:10:31 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e34ce1683c VLAN: Reorder init to get same behavior for all VLAN interfaces
Both the wildcard VLAN entry and the statically configured VLAN
interfaces should behave in the same way. Initializing the
full dynamic VLAN code before adding the statically configured VLAN
interfaces allows the same processing to be applied to both statically
and dynamically added VLAN interface (i.e., also the statically
configured ones will be added to a bridge).
2010-04-17 09:48:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0249c988bb VLAN: Set statically configured VLAN interfaces up
This is needed to be able to bind stations to them with mac80211.
2010-04-17 09:45:18 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
37eb8da957 nl80211: Fix wpa_supplicant build 2010-04-16 14:13:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b9c3e576cb VLAN: Fix bridge interface clean up for no tagged_interface case 2010-04-16 01:13:46 +03:00
M. Braun
20e2cb0ae0 VLAN: Decrease bridge forwarding delay to avoid EAPOL timeouts 2010-04-16 00:48:32 +03:00
M. Braun
0ab7a701ab nl80211: Fix initial add_ifidx() realloc to not forget values
We need to make a copy of the old entries the first time the
if_indices buffer gets allocated.
2010-04-16 00:39:59 +03:00
M. Braun
97cfcf6482 nl80211: Add bridge interfaces to own ifindex list automatically
Whenever our own interface is added to a bridge, add that bridge
into the list of own interfaces.
2010-04-16 00:36:33 +03:00
M. Braun
37ba0928d5 VLAN: Set dynamic VLAN up to fix STA bind and key setup 2010-04-15 23:54:41 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
cd1d72c1d0 nl80211: Add more debug info on NL80211_ATTR_STA_VLAN failures 2010-04-15 23:46:49 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4254100d6c Stop processing if STA VLAN bind fails 2010-04-15 23:44:10 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
91faf6b948 VLAN: Clean up debug code and error messages 2010-04-15 20:35:51 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c47cf42e4b WPS: Fix association when both WPS and WPA/RSN IE are included
The WPS IE was overriding the WPA/RSN IE in driver based MLME case
(hostapd_notif_assoc), but the MLME code here was not using WPS IE
correctly, i.e., it allowed the WPA/RSN IE override the operation.
2010-04-15 12:55:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
843123590a Fix hostapd build without WPS 2010-04-12 15:15:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0cb445a472 Fix internal DH implementation not to pad shared key
The returned buffer length was hardcoded to be the prime length
which resulted in shorter results being padded in the end. However,
the results from DH code are supposed to be unpadded (and when used
with WPS, the padding is done in WPS code and it is added to the
beginning of the buffer). This fixes WPS key derivation errors
in about 1/256 of runs ("WPS: Incorrect Authenticator") when using
the internal crypto code.
2010-04-12 12:25:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0544b24248 Add BSSID and reason code (if available) to disconnect event
This adds more details into the CTRL-EVENT-DISCONNECTED event to
make it easier to figure out which network was disconnected in some
race conditions and to what could have been the reason for
disconnection. The reason code is currently only available with
the nl80211 driver wrapper.
2010-04-11 21:25:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e3802622db nl80211: Define set_freq for wpa_supplicant, too 2010-04-11 20:36:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c706d5aa17 Add wpa_supplicant AP mode events for Public Action frames 2010-04-11 20:33:33 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
195420b8d1 Add WPS Registrar success callback 2010-04-11 20:21:08 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b3db190fa2 Started to make set_ap_wps_ie() capable of adding multiple IEs
This mechanism can be used to add various IEs to Beacon and Probe
Response frames and it should be made clear that it is not reserved
only for WPS IE.
2010-04-11 20:16:43 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
087f0254d7 FT: Fix wpa_sm_set_ft_params wrapper for non-FT build 2010-04-11 19:49:32 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
814782b9fe Allow driver wrappers to indicate maximum remain-on-channel duration 2010-04-11 19:42:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
de12717a56 nl80211: Fix key configuration in wpa_supplicant AP mode 2010-04-11 19:35:24 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
bc19f67240 nl80211: Remove forgotten Action frame registration example 2010-04-11 19:32:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f3585c8a85 Simplify driver_ops for virtual interface add/remove
There is no absolute requirement for separating address allocation
into separate functions, so simplify the driver wrapper interface
to use just if_add and if_remove instead of adding the new
alloc_interface_addr() and release_interface_addr() functions.

if_add() can now indicate if the driver forced a different interface
name or address on the virtual interface.
2010-04-11 19:23:09 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
addb584881 EAP-MD5: Use conditional success decision
The server may still reject authentication at this point, so better
use conditional success decision. This allows the potentially
following EAP-Failure message to be processed properly. [Bug 354]
2010-04-11 13:43:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f8bf142175 nl80211: Fix memory leak on send_action error path 2010-04-11 12:29:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8d6399e455 Use unsigned bitfield for 1-bit values 2010-04-11 12:27:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e6ecca7737 Fix wpa_sm_has_ptk() no-WPA wrapper location 2010-04-11 11:39:14 +03:00
Yogesh Ashok Powar
721abef9b3 Allow advertising of U-APSD functionality in Beacon
hostapd does not implement UAPSD functionality. However, if U-APSD
functionality is implemented outside hostapd, add support to advertise
the functionality in beacon.

Signed-off-by: yogeshp@marvell.com
2010-04-11 11:32:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0f857f43df FT: Validate MDIE and FTIE in FT 4-way handshake message 2/4 2010-04-10 22:40:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0d7b44099f SME: Do not try to use FT over-the-air if PTK is not available 2010-04-10 22:39:49 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3b4f6dac19 FT: Verify that MDIE and FTIE matches between AssocResp and EAPOL-Key 3/4 2010-04-10 22:06:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5af8187e11 Split EAPOL-Key msg 3/4 Key Data validation into helper functions 2010-04-10 21:55:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
86dfabb809 FT: Add FTIE, TIE[ReassocDeadline], TIE[KeyLifetime] to EAPOL-Key 3/4
These are mandatory IEs to be included in the FT 4-Way Handshake
Message 3.
2010-04-10 21:42:54 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
48de343cd4 Add more verbose debugging for EAPOL-Key Key Data field IEs/KDEs 2010-04-10 21:42:01 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
55046414b1 FT: Copy MDIE and FTIE from (Re)Association Response into EAPOL-Key 2/4
IEEE Std 802.11r-2008 requires that the message 2 includes FTIE and
MDIE from the AP's (Re)Association Response frame in the Key Data
field.
2010-04-10 16:48:40 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d3ccead325 Make wpa_compare_rsn_ie() handle missing IEs 2010-04-10 16:47:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1566ec4685 Parse EAPOL-Key msg 2/4 Key Data IEs/KDEs before checking RSN/WPA IE
This is needed to avoid incorrect validation errors on RSN/WPA IE
when using FT since there may be more than a single IE in the
Key Data field.
2010-04-10 16:46:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e7846b6859 FT: Clean up wpa_sm_set_ft_params() by using common parse
Instead of parsing the IEs in the callers, use the already existing
parser in wpa_ft.c to handle MDIE and FTIE from initial MD association
response. In addition, this provides more complete access to association
response IEs to FT code which will be needed to fix FT 4-way handshake
message 2/4.
2010-04-10 11:36:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0ae145cde8 FT: Validate FTIE fields in Reassociation Request
ANonce, SNonce, R0KH-ID, and R1KH-ID must match with the values
used in the previous FT authentication sequence message per
IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.8.4.
2010-04-09 17:14:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8aaf894de2 FT: Validate protect IE count in FTIE MIC Control 2010-04-09 17:08:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
148fb67d5e FT: Validate SNonce and ANonce values during FT Protocol in supplicant 2010-04-09 17:02:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f4ec630d1b FT: Set FT Capability and Policy properly in MDIE during initial MD assoc
This field needs to be copied from the scan results for the AP
per IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.4.2.
2010-04-09 16:41:57 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
76b7981d07 FT: Copy FT Capability and Policy to MDIE from target AP
This sets the FT Capability and Policy field in the MDIE to the values
received from the target AP (if available). This fixes the MDIE contents
during FT Protocol, but the correct value may not yet be used in initial
mobility domain association.
2010-04-09 16:26:20 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3db6531436 FT: Add R1KH-ID into FT auth seq 3rd message (Reassoc Req)
This is a mandatory subelement per IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.8.4.
2010-04-09 16:08:50 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6e80516ab9 FT: Fix Reassociation Response in FT Protocol to include ANonce/SNonce
These values are required to be included in the frame per
IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.8.5.
2010-04-09 13:36:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1f6e69e07b FT: Do not add MIC to FTIE during initial MD association
We do not have any keys set at this point so there is no point in
adding the MIC. In addition, IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.4.2
describes this frame to have MIC IE count of 0 and MIC of 0.
2010-04-09 13:30:49 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6de513fcd3 Fix compiler warning on non-802.11r build 2010-04-08 12:25:19 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7733991281 nl80211: Start using NL80211_ATTR_LOCAL_STATE_CHANGE
This removes transmission of some unnecessary Deauthentication
frames in cases where we only need to clear the local state. In
addition, this resolves issues for 802.11r FT-over-DS by allowing
authentication state to be set locally even when no actual
Authentication frame is to be transmitted.
2010-04-08 11:31:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
27cf8871ad Sync with wireless-testing.git include/linux/nl80211.h
This adds NL80211_ATTR_LOCAL_STATE_CHANGE.
2010-04-08 11:29:54 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
39eb4d0877 FT: Fix GTK subelement format in FTIE
The Key Info field was changed from 1-octet field to 2-octet field
in 802.11r/D7.0, but that had not been updated in the implementation.
2010-04-07 23:57:39 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
26e23750b9 FT: Fix FT 4-Way Handshake to include PMKR1Name in messages 2 and 3
IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.4.2 describes FT initial mobility domain
association in an RSN to include PMKR1Name in the PMKID-List field
in RSN IE in messages 2/4 and 3/4. This makes the RSN IE not be
bitwise identical with the values used in Beacon, Probe Response,
(Re)association Request frames.

The previous versions of wpa_supplicant and hostapd did not add the
PMKR1Name value in EAPOL-Key frame and did not accept it if added
(due to bitwise comparison of RSN IEs). This commit fixes the
implementation to be compliant with the standard by adding the
PMKR1Name value into EAPOL-Key messages during FT 4-Way Handshake and
by verifying that the received value matches with the value derived
locally.

This breaks interoperability with previous wpa_supplicant/hostapd
versions.
2010-04-07 21:04:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
738a1cb286 FT: Do not include RSN IE in (Re)Assoc Resp during initial MD association
RSN IE is only supposed to be included in Reassociation Response frames
and only when they are part of a fast BSS transition.
2010-04-07 17:27:46 +03:00
Gregory Detal
bb437f282b AP: Add wpa_msg() events for EAP server state machine 2010-04-07 11:13:14 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
68532a9ceb Avoid hostapd segfault on invalid driver association event
Running hostapd and wpa_supplicant on the same interface at the same
time is not expected to work, but it should not cause hostapd to crash.
Ignore station mode association events (no addr field) to avoid this.
2010-04-07 10:01:49 +03:00
Andriy Tkachuk
99f4ae67b7 Fix WPA/RSN IE update on reconfig with set_generic_elem()
IF WPA/RSN parameters were changed or WPA/RSN was disabled, the
WPA/RSN IE in Beacon/Probe Response frames was only update with
set_beacon(). We need to do this with set_generic_elem(), too, to
work with all driver wrappers.
2010-04-06 20:44:26 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
643743e215 WPS: Fix WPS IE update in Beacon frames for nl80211
Call ieee802_11_set_beacon() in addition to set_ap_wps_ie() when
processing WPS IE updates. This is needed with drivers that use
set_beacon() instead of set_ap_wps_ie() (i.e., nl80211).
2010-04-06 18:04:30 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2c59362905 WPS: Add a workaround for incorrect NewWLANEventMAC format
Some ER implementation (e.g., some versions of Intel PROSet) seem to
use incorrect format for WLANEventMAC variable in PutWLANResponse.
Work around this by allowing various MAC address formats to be used
in this variable (debug message will be shown if the colon-deliminated
format specified in WFA WLANConfig 1.0 is not used).
2010-04-06 10:38:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
448a0a19d7 Add a more flexible version of hwaddr_aton: hwaddr_aton2()
This version of the MAC address parser allows number of different
string formats for the address (e.g., 00:11:22:33:44:55, 0011.2233.4455,
001122334455, 00-11-22-33-44-55). It returns the number of characters
used from the input string in case of success.
2010-04-06 10:37:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
81a658d754 FT: Re-set PTK on reassociation
It turns out that this is needed for both FT-over-DS and FT-over-air
when using mac80211, so it looks easiest to just unconditionally
re-configure the keys after reassociation when FT is used.
2010-04-04 09:34:14 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2220821113 FT: Use bridge interface (if set) for RRB connection
This fixes receiving of RRB messages between FT APs
2010-04-04 09:31:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
21c9b6903e FT: Set WLAN_AUTH_FT auth_alg on FT-over-DS case
This is needed to allow reassociation processing to skip 4-way handshake
when FT-over-DS is used with an AP that has a previous association state
with the STA.
2010-04-04 09:17:57 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d8ad6cb966 FT: Force key configuration after association in FT-over-DS
This seems to be needed at least with mac80211 when a STA is using
FT-over-DS to reassociate back to the AP when the AP still has the
previous association state.
2010-04-04 09:16:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9a3cb18d74 Add AP-STA-DISCONNECT event for driver-based MLME 2010-04-04 08:14:22 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c41a1095b5 Allow hostapd_notif_assoc() to be called with all IEs
This makes the call simpler for driver wrappers since there is no need
to parse the IEs anymore before indicating association. In addition,
this allows association processing to be extended to use other IEs
in the future.
2010-04-04 08:14:18 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0823031750 Fix Windows compilation issues with AP mode code 2010-04-04 08:14:14 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ade07077ec Add address to hostapd_logger output in wpa_supplicant as AP case 2010-04-04 08:14:09 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
93368ca4a2 WPS: Do not include Label in default Config Methods
This avoids conflict with both Label and Display being included at
the same time (which would make it difficult to figure out which
PIN was actually used).
2010-04-04 08:14:02 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
11356a2ab5 WPS: Fix PBC session overlap detection to use Device Password Id
Active PBC mode is indicated by Device Password Id == 4, not Config Methods
attribute.
2010-04-04 08:13:59 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f8130b07bb driver_osx: Update set_key arguments to fix build 2010-04-04 08:13:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7b1080dadd MFP: Fix IGTK PN in group rekeying
IGTK get_seqnum needs to be skipped in the same way as GTK one when
rekeying group keys. Previously, the old PN value (the one from the
previous key) was indicated and that resulted in MMIE replay detection
at the station.
2010-03-29 22:57:10 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
32d5295f9d Add a drop_sa command to allow 802.11w testing
This drops PTK and PMK without notifying the AP.
2010-03-29 15:42:04 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
358c3691cf MFP: Add SA Query Request processing in AP mode 2010-03-29 14:05:25 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b91ab76e8c Add test commands for sending deauth/disassoc without dropping state
This can be used to test 802.11w by sending a protected or unprotected
deauth/disassoc frame.

hostapd_cli deauth <dst addr> test=<0/1>
hostapd_cli disassoc <dst addr> test=<0/1>

test=0: unprotected
test=1: protected
2010-03-29 12:01:40 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e820cf952f MFP: Add MFPR flag into station RSN IE if 802.11w is mandatory 2010-03-29 10:48:01 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
a042f8447d Fix ctrl_iface get-STA-MIB for WPS disabled case
The previous version would crash here on NULL pointer dereference if
WPS was disabled.
2010-03-29 09:59:16 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b625473c6c Add driver command and event for signal strength monitoring 2010-03-28 15:31:04 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
93910401c9 nl80211: Parse CQM events 2010-03-28 13:56:40 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
d43331b6ea Sync with wireless-testing.git include/linux/nl80211.h 2010-03-28 12:47:17 -07:00
Holger Schurig
2ea2fcc7e6 nl80211: Fix WEP key configuration for prior to authentication
The driver data was changed from struct wpa_driver_nl80211_data * to
struct i802_bss * and the internal call will need to match that change.
2010-03-27 22:22:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
03bcb0af0d Fix wpa_auth_iface_iter() to skip BSSes without Authenticator
This could cause NULL pointer deference if multi-BSS configuration
was used with OKC in some cases.
2010-03-26 23:26:24 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
9fad706c68 nl80211: Add more debug information about scan request parameters 2010-03-26 22:22:38 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
15664ad01a nl80211: Silence set_key ENOLINK failure messages on key clearing
This happens in common case and is expected, so there is no need to
include the potentially confusing failure message in the debug log.
2010-03-26 21:58:31 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ef580012d1 FT: Fix Authorized flag setting for FT protocol
4-way handshake or EAPOL is not used in this case, so we must
force Authorized flag to be set at the conclusion of successful
FT protocol run.
2010-03-13 21:43:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5d5a9f0021 FT: Clean EAPOL supp portValid to force re-entry to AUTHENTICATED
This fixed FT-over-DS to end up in Authorized state when the EAPOL
PAE state machine re-enters AUTHENTICATED.
2010-03-13 21:40:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0e84c25434 FT: Fix PTK configuration in authenticator
Must update sm->pairwise when fetching PMK-R1 SA.
Add a workaround for drivers that cannot set keys before association
(e.g., cfg80211/mac80211): retry PTK configuration after association.
2010-03-13 21:11:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2a7e7f4e4a FT: Add driver op for marking a STA authenticated
This can be used with FT-over-DS where FT Action frame exchange
triggers transition to State 2 (authenticated) without Authentication
frame exchange.
2010-03-13 18:28:15 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
86f7b62a33 FT: Add a workaround to set PTK after reassociation
If the PTK configuration prior to association fails, allow reassociation
attempt to continue and configure PTK after association. This is a
workaround for drivers that do not allow PTK to be configured before
association (e.g., current cfg80211/mac80211).
2010-03-13 17:15:38 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
bdda27eb17 Fix WPS IE in Probe Response frame to include proper Config Methods values
This attribute is supposed to indicate which methods the AP supports as
an Enrollee for adding external Registrars. It was left to 0 when the
AP code did not yet support external Registrars and was forgotten when
the ER support was added.
2010-03-13 13:39:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
73fc617d5c nl80211: Fix FT Action send command
Need to include payload header in the data length to avoid sending
truncated FT Action frame.
2010-03-12 00:41:03 +02:00
Masashi Honma
c1bbb0cee1 NetBSD: Fix driver_bsd.c build
On NetBSD 5.0.2, wpa_supplicant build results in messages below.

../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c: In function 'wpa_driver_bsd_get_ssid':
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:876: warning: passing argument 2 of 'bsd_get_ssid'
from incompatible pointer type
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:876: warning: passing argument 3 of 'bsd_get_ssid'
makes integer from pointer without a cast
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:876: error: too many arguments to function
'bsd_get_ssid'
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c: In function 'wpa_driver_bsd_scan':
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:1125: warning: passing argument 2 of 'bsd_set_ssid'
from incompatible pointer type
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:1125: warning: passing argument 3 of 'bsd_set_ssid'
makes integer from pointer without a cast
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:1125: error: too many arguments to function
'bsd_set_ssid'
gmake: *** [../src/drivers/driver_bsd.o] Error 1

This patch solves this issue.
2010-03-10 23:33:10 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7b90c16aa9 nl80211: Add preliminary implementation of FT Action send
This is a step in adding FT support with nl80211-based drivers.
driver_nl80211.c is now registering to handle the FT Action frames
and is able to transmit FT Request frame. Received FT Action frames
are not yet indicated as driver events.
2010-03-07 22:47:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1b484d60e5 FT: Include pairwise cipher suite in PMK-R0 SA and PMK-R1 SA
This is needed to fix PTK derivation to use correct length. Previously,
64-octet PTK may have been derived if the authenticator did not already
have a STA entry. Now, the correct pairwise cipher suite is learned when
then PMK-R1 SA is received.
2010-03-07 22:18:33 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5205c4f98a nl80211: Fix driver context pointer for auth-failure-case
The new per-BSS context needs to be used here when calling
wpa_driver_nl80211_deauthenticate() to avoid passing incorrect
data type to the function.
2010-03-07 21:29:34 +02:00
Marcin Marzec
f400f4f34b Fix typo in WPA_AUTH_ALG_FT definition
This was not supposed to have duplicate value with WPA_AUTH_ALG_LEAP.
The previous version was unable to set FT as the authentication
algorithm with nl80211.
2010-03-07 21:02:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0ebdf62735 Remove unnecessary ifname parameter from set_ap_wps_ie() driver op 2010-03-07 11:51:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d3e3a20565 Remove unnecessary ifname parameter from set_ht_params() driver op 2010-03-07 11:49:27 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3234cba40e Remove unnecessary ifname parameter to sta_set_flags() driver op 2010-03-07 11:45:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
62847751e4 Remove unnecessary ifname parameter from sta_add() driver op 2010-03-07 11:42:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8709de1ae8 Remove unnecessary ifname parameter from hapd_get_ssid/hapd_set_ssid 2010-03-07 11:36:45 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
aa48451698 Remove unnecessary ifname parameter from set_generic_elem() driver op 2010-03-07 11:33:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d5dd016a8a Remove unneeded ifname parameter from set_privacy() driver op 2010-03-07 11:29:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
044372a333 driver_test: Use driver private BSS context instead of BSS lookup
The ifname-based lookup can now be replaced with the new mechanism that
allows driver wrappers to register per-BSS context data.
2010-03-07 11:26:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
70a8419f26 Avoid crash after driver init failure
hostapd_flush_old_stations() needs to check whether the driver
initialization was successful since it gets called on an error path.
2010-03-07 11:25:28 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7ab68865c0 Remove unneeded iface parameter from if_add() driver op 2010-03-07 10:05:05 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
071799872f hostapd: fix a segfault in the error path of the nl80211 if_add function 2010-03-07 09:59:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
05ba8690cb nl80211: Unregister forgotten eloop socket on init failure 2010-03-06 22:37:48 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8b897f5a17 Remove unnecessary ifname parameter from set_beacon()
The new per-BSS driver context makes this unnecessary.
2010-03-06 22:36:40 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
53f3d6f3e6 hostapd: allow stations to move between different bss interfaces
With this patch, a client gets kicked out of the last BSS it was
attached to, when it is associating to a different one.
While mac80211 does allow a station to be present on multiple bss
interfaces, this does seem to cause problems both for the stack
and for hostapd.
2010-03-06 22:30:25 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
a2e40bb650 hostapd: Fix interface selection for the nl80211 driver
This patch allows the nl80211 driver to create its own per-bss context
and pass it to the drv_priv pointer of the hostapd bss state.
With this and the following patch, stations can associate to and switch
between multiple BSS interfaces of a single wiphy.
This obsoletes a few instances of passing ifname to a callback, those
can be removed in a separate patch.
It might also be useful to move more fields from the driver data to the
per-bss data structure in the future.
2010-03-06 22:22:56 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
39f42d1193 hostapd: fix bogus nl80211 interface remove messages for STA WDS 2010-03-06 20:52:22 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
4c32757d22 hostapd: add ifname to the sta_set_flags callback
This fixes multi-BSS STA operations (e.g., setting AUTHORIZED flag) with
nl80211-based drivers.
2010-03-06 20:44:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ffd2c8cd4d Avoid warnings on unused function/variables if debug is disabled
CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG removes wpa_printf() calls, so need to ifdef
some function and variable definitions to avoid compiler warnings.
2010-03-06 16:37:57 +02:00
Kel Modderman
09bd6e8cca wpa_supplicant: fix FTBFS on Debian GNU/kFreeBSD
This patch allows wpa_supplicant to compile on Debian's kfreebsd
architectures.

Patch by Stefan Lippers-Hollmann based on work done by Petr Salinger
and Emmanuel Bouthenot for 0.6.X (http://bugs.debian.org/480572).
2010-03-06 10:16:47 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d2f46a2b13 bsd: Use os_strlcpy instead of strlcpy 2010-03-06 10:04:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3812464cda Add optional scan result filter based on SSID
filter_ssids=1 global configuration parameter can now be used to
enable scan result filtering (with -Dnl80211 only for now) based on
the configured SSIDs. In other words, only the scan results that have
an SSID matching with one of the configured networks are included in the
BSS table. This can be used to reduce memory needs in environments that
have huge number of APs.
2010-03-05 21:42:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
207ef3fb12 Add suspend/resume notifications
wpa_supplicant can now be notified of suspend/resume events, e.g.,
from pm-action scripts. This allows wpa_supplicant to clear information
that may become invalid during a suspend operation.
2010-02-27 18:46:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
94d9bfd59b Rename EAP server source files to avoid duplicate names
This makes it easier to build both EAP peer and server functionality
into the same project with some toolchains.
2010-02-19 18:54:07 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6fa2ec2d2b Make EAPOL Authenticator buildable with Microsoft compiler 2010-02-19 18:35:40 +02:00
Masashi Honma
c6611ed995 bsd: Use device capability information
This patch enables the use of device capability information from the
driver when possible.
2010-02-16 19:47:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
58f6fbe05c nl80211: Add support for off-channel Action TX/RX commands
The kernel side support for this was just added into
wireless-testing.git. This commit adds the driver wrapper code needed
to allow wpa_supplicant to use the new functionality.
2010-02-16 19:41:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b7a2b0b68c Add alloc_interface_addr() drv op option for specifying ifname
Some drivers may need to use a specific ifname for the virtual
interface, so allow them to do this with a new parameter passed
to the alloc_interface_addr() handler.
2010-02-16 19:34:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
01b350ed74 Sync with linux/nl80211.h from wireless-testing.git 2010-02-16 19:28:38 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
25ac1328f6 EAP-TNC: Add Flags field into fragment acknowledgement
TNC IF-T is somewhat unclear on this are, but
draft-hanna-nea-pt-eap-00.txt, which is supposed to define the same
protocol, is clearer on the Flags field being included.

This change breaks interoperability with the old implementation if
EAP-TNC fragmentation is used. The old version would not accept
the acknowledgement message with the added Flags octet while the
new version accepts messagss with with both options.
2010-02-14 16:08:15 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
62477841a1 EAP-TNC server: Fix processing when last message is fragmented
If the last message from the EAP-TNC server was fragmented, the
fragment processing lost the DONE/FAIL state and did not know how
to handle the final ACK from the peer. Fix this by remembering the
earlier DONE/FAIL state when fragmenting a frame.
2010-02-13 18:03:52 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b29d086d50 EAP-TNC: Accept fragment ack frame with Flags field
TNC IF-T specification is unclear on the exact contents of the fragment
acknowledgement frame. An interoperability issue with the tncs@fhh
implementation was reported by Arne Welzel
<arne.welzel@stud.fh-hannover.de> due to the different interpretations
of the specification. Relax EAP-TNC server/peer validation rules to
accept fragmentation acknowledgement frames to include the Flags field
to avoid this issue.
2010-02-13 18:00:39 +02:00
Masashi Honma
0c6bdf91ea bsd: Aggregate ioctl routines
This patch aggregates ioctls.

First is SIOCS80211. The SIOCS80211's arguments has 3 couples.
        1-1. i_len, i_data
        1-2. i_val
        1-3. i_len, i_data, i_val (currently only IEEE80211_IOC_APPIE)
There were 3 routines for each cases. This patch aggregates these to
one.

Second is SIOCG80211. The SIOCG80211 returns 2 type of value.
        2-1. i_len
        2-2. i_val
There were 2 routines for each cases. This patch aggregates these to
one.

I have tested on both FreeBSD 8.0 and NetBSD 5.0.1 with these cases.

[hostapd]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(STA)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(AP)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
2010-02-13 13:59:29 +02:00
Masashi Honma
88487b0e0b FreeBSD: Add support for FreeBSD 8.0 STA/AP
This patch adds both wpa_supplicant and hostapd support for
FreeBSD 8.0.

I refered
http://www.jp.freebsd.org/cgi/cvsweb.cgi/src/usr.sbin/wpa/hostapd/driver_freebsd
.c
http://www.jp.freebsd.org/cgi/cvsweb.cgi/src/usr.sbin/wpa/wpa_supplicant/driver_
freebsd.c

I have tested on FreeBSD 8.0 with these cases.

[hostapd]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(STA)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(AP)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
2010-02-13 13:57:39 +02:00
Masashi Honma
362468d117 FreeBSD: Enable channel control
This patch enables FreeBSD channel control.

I have tested on FreeBSD 7.2 with these cases.

[hostapd]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(STA)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(AP)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
2010-02-13 13:54:27 +02:00
Masashi Honma
e1b1309b6a bsd: Unify wpa_driver_bsd_ops
The attached patch unifies hostapd wpa_driver_bsd_ops and
wpa_supplicant wpa_driver_bsd_ops.

I have tested on NetBSD 5.0.1 with these cases.

[hostapd]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(STA)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(AP)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
2010-02-13 13:52:03 +02:00
Masashi Honma
86b24ea93c bsd: Unify struct bsd_driver_data and struct wpa_driver_bsd_data
This patch unifies struct bsd_driver_data and struct wpa_driver_bsd_data.
2010-02-13 13:50:19 +02:00
Masashi Honma
6850c70742 bsd: Use same field name between hostapd and wpa_supplicant
This patch modifies field name of struct bsd_driver_data to use
same name of struct wpa_driver_bsd_data. This is a preparation of
unifying struct bsd_driver_data and struct wpa_driver_bsd_data.
2010-02-13 13:48:52 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
00468b4650 Add TLS client events, server probing, and srv cert matching
This allows external programs (e.g., UI) to get more information
about server certificate chain used during TLS handshake. This can
be used both to automatically probe the authentication server to
figure out most likely network configuration and to get information
about reasons for failed authentications.

The follow new control interface events are used for this:
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-PEER-CERT
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-TLS-CERT-ERROR

In addition, there is now an option for matching the server certificate
instead of the full certificate chain for cases where a trusted CA is
not configured or even known. This can be used, e.g., by first probing
the network and learning the server certificate hash based on the new
events and then adding a network configuration with the server
certificate hash after user have accepted it. Future connections will
then be allowed as long as the same server certificate is used.

Authentication server probing can be done, e.g., with following
configuration options:
    eap=TTLS PEAP TLS
    identity=""
    ca_cert="probe://"

Example set of control events for this:
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-STARTED EAP authentication started
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-PROPOSED-METHOD vendor=0 method=21
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-METHOD EAP vendor 0 method 21 (TTLS) selected
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-PEER-CERT depth=0 subject='/C=US/ST=California/L=San Francisco/CN=Server/emailAddress=server@kir.nu' hash=5a1bc1296205e6fdbe3979728efe3920798885c1c4590b5f90f43222d239ca6a
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-TLS-CERT-ERROR reason=8 depth=0 subject='/C=US/ST=California/L=San Francisco/CN=Server/emailAddress=server@kir.nu' err='Server certificate chain probe'
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-FAILURE EAP authentication failed

Server certificate matching is configured with ca_cert, e.g.:
    ca_cert="hash://server/sha256/5a1bc1296205e6fdbe3979728efe3920798885c1c4590b5f90f43222d239ca6a"

This functionality is currently available only with OpenSSL. Other
TLS libraries (including internal implementation) may be added in
the future.
2010-02-13 11:14:23 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c7d711609b Fix memory leak on TLS setup error path
Need tof free TLS context in some cases to avoid a memory leak
on error path.
2010-02-13 10:19:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2e06e9dd6f Fix TLS in/out buffer freeing
The previous version could end leaking memory since os_free() was used
instead of wpabuf_free(). In addition, this could potentially have
triggered a crash if the TLS context were being freed when pending
input data where still in the buffer (though, this may not be possible
to trigger in practice).
2010-02-12 21:13:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
cf123d7f4c OpenSSL: Fix tls_init(NULL) with FIPS-enabled build
The conf argument to tls_init() may be NULL (as it is when using
hostapd), so we must check that here before dereferencing the
pointer.
2010-02-12 20:51:10 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e0b3b3cb77 WPS: Fix AP operation with internal Registrar when ER is also active
Ignore the pending WPS message from ER (PutWLANReseponse action) if the
internal Registrar has already sent out M2.
2010-02-12 12:38:14 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7796f20edc Add new ctrl_iface event for EAP methods proposed by the server
This makes it easier for external programs to probe EAP server
preferences and potentially automatically detect which method
could be used.
2010-02-11 19:48:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e748062b58 nl80211: Do not try to remove non-existing STA WDS interface
This removes confusing error messages from the default (no WDS) case.
2010-02-10 11:29:53 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
aba7569ec8 driver_bsd: Fix build without SIOCS80211CHANNEL
At least FreeBSD 7 does not seem to define this and failed to build
after the previous changes.
2010-02-08 21:41:51 +02:00
Masashi Honma
42f34a9b41 driver_bsd.c: Enable AP mode wpa_supplicant 2010-02-08 21:33:59 +02:00
Masashi Honma
d373725686 driver_bsd: Clean up EAPOL frame transmission code
The bsd_send_eapol() adds Ethernet header by itself. This patch changes it
to use l2_packet functionality.

I have tested on NetBSD 5.0.1 with WPA-PSK(TKIP).
2010-02-08 21:28:59 +02:00
Masashi Honma
719196b159 driver_bsd.c: Reduce code duplication (setkey)
This patch reduces code duplication between hostapd and wpa_supplicant
for IEEE80211_IOC_WPAKEY.
2010-02-08 21:25:18 +02:00
Masashi Honma
60bc30333c driver_bsd.c: Reduce code duplication (ifflag)
This patch reduces code duplication between hostapd and wpa_supplicant
for SIOC[GS]IFFLAGS.
2010-02-08 21:23:28 +02:00
Masashi Honma
fa6b8afe6f driver_bsd.c: Reduce code duplication (MLME)
This patch reduces code duplication between hostapd and wpa_supplicant
about IEEE80211_IOC_MLME. This is a preparation for AP mode
wpa_supplicant.
2010-02-08 21:21:23 +02:00
Masashi Honma
cbdecd2b0d driver_bsd.c: Reduce code duplication (DELKEY)
This patch reduces code duplication between hostapd and wpa_supplicant
about IEEE80211_IOC_DELKEY. This is a preparation for AP mode
wpa_supplicant. This is a patch to
http://lists.shmoo.com/pipermail/hostap/2010-January/021030.html.
2010-02-08 21:18:09 +02:00
Masashi Honma
5197244a04 bsd: Enable auto configuration
On NetBSD, we should configure some parameters manually out of hostapd
like below.

  ifconfig ath0 mediaopt hostap
  ifconfig ath0 mode 11g
  ifconfig ath0 chan 6

This patch does these automatically. Maybe there will be some
objections, like "hardware configuration is not hostapd/wpa_supplican's
work". So I will write the reasons why I made this patch.

1. For usability.
2. The first command fails when previous state is adhoc. This patch is
free from previous state.
3. Some driver wrappers configure these automatically (like nl80211).
4. I have wasted time trying to find out these command were needed :(
2010-02-08 21:14:22 +02:00
Masashi Honma
82f36163ac driver_bsd.c: Use os_free() instead of free()
This patch replaces some free() with os_free() when the memory was
allocated by os_*().
2010-02-08 21:11:52 +02:00
Hamish Guthrie
79e4140c61 driver_ps3: Remove legacy ps3 wpa driver
The ps3 wireless kernel driver has wireless extension support.
There is a legacy wpa_supplicant driver, and support for this
has been removed from the kernel driver, as no distributions
are using it.
2010-02-08 21:08:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8856462d61 nl80211: Dump scan results in debug log if association command fails
This may help in debugging why cfg80211 refused the association
command since the scan results should include information about all
pending authentication and association states.
2010-01-24 18:11:30 -08:00
Jouni Malinen
582507be85 nl80211: Clear cfg80211 authentication data for old entries
cfg80211 has a limit on pending authentications, so we better clear
the entries that we do not care about to avoid hitting the limit
when roaming between multiple APs.
2010-01-24 18:07:34 -08:00
Christian Lamparter
43a7fe2e0e ap: Reorder authsrv_init() to fix IEEE 802.1X initialization
This patch moves the authentication server setup before
IEEE 802.1X initialization. It's because 802.1X already
needs to have a valid SSL context.

Signed-off-by: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com>
2010-01-17 12:14:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
dff0f701d0 Preparations for v0.7.1 release 2010-01-16 19:04:38 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
de1b2d143a Make sure the resutl from readlink is properly null terminated 2010-01-16 17:19:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8c0906542c Fetch IEs from both Beacon and Probe Response frames if available
This allows the driver wrappers to return two sets of IEs, so that
the BSS code can use information from both Beacon and Probe Response
frames if needed. For example, some Cisco APs seem to include more
information in Wireless Provisioning Services IE when it is in the
Beacon frame.
2010-01-16 16:11:05 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
94627f6cc8 hostapd: Detect bridge interface automatically
This makes the bridge parameter unnecessary for cases where the interface
is already in a bridge and sysfs is mounted to /sys so that the detection
code works.

For nl80211, the bridge parameter can be used to request the AP
interface to be added to the bridge automatically (brctl may refuse to
do this before hostapd has been started to change the interface mode).
If needed, the bridge interface is also created.
2010-01-16 15:19:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d455d0806e driver_test: Learn scan result channel from DS Params IE 2010-01-16 12:26:03 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c35faef51a driver_test: Initialize bss_ctx based on drv->ctx for new BSS interfaces
This is needed with wpa_supplicant to get the correct context pointer
for a virtual BSS interface.
2010-01-16 12:24:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
37b776eac1 driver_test: Add support for per-SSID scans for non-MLME case 2010-01-16 12:23:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
af47308823 Add deinit_ap driver op to help wpa_supplicant AP mode use 2010-01-16 12:20:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e882899981 Add BSSID to TX/RX Action frame driver ops
This meets better the needs for various Public Action frame use cases.
2010-01-16 12:16:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4e5cb1a366 Add driver op for disabling 802.11b rates 2010-01-16 12:11:19 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ae58592894 Sync with wireless-testing.git linux/nl80211.h 2010-01-16 12:06:42 +02:00
Masashi Honma
11386396cc driver_bsd.c: Clean up EAPOL frame transmission code
The bsd_send_eapol() prepares 3000 bytes buffer for every EAPOL
frame transmission. I think malloc() is better way for efficient
memory use.
2010-01-16 11:47:05 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b590812e8f Add preliminary documentation for ctrl_iface events 2010-01-15 19:24:08 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3145e6154c wext: Add cfg80211-specific optimization to avoid silly behavior
If the driver is detected to use cfg80211, we can rely on it being able
to disconnect with SIOCSIWMLME commands and to use empty SSID as a way
to stop it from associating when we are in progress of configuring the
driver for association. Consequently, we can remove the hack that uses
random 32-octet SSID to force disconnection and re-order association
commands to match the expectations that cfg80211 has for WEXT ioctls.
This gets rid of extra scan rounds and attempts to associate with the
silly 32-octet SSID.
2010-01-12 20:01:09 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4a5869206e wext: Check hexstr2bin() return value in custom scan text processing 2010-01-10 22:26:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a7efb16052 WEXT: Show BSSID/SSID set failures on disconnect in debug log 2010-01-10 22:18:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
fbe3e7f840 wext: Check hexstr2bin() return value 2010-01-10 22:16:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
68fd595fa5 WPS ER: Check uuid_str2bin() return value 2010-01-10 22:12:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4f6050e796 WPS ER: Verify os_get_random() return value 2010-01-10 22:08:43 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4edc521068 EAP-FAST peer: Clean up PAC writing function
Use more explicit validation of input parameters and clean up the
writes by using a local end-of-buffer variable to simplify
calculations.
2010-01-10 22:04:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2e320d8db5 eloop: Clear timeout data during allocation
Better make sure the eloop_timeout data gets fully initialized. The
current code is filling in all the fields, but it is clearer to just
zero the buffer to make sure any new field added to the structure gets
initialized.
2010-01-10 21:48:27 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6f9b5d1696 IBSS RSN: Check explicitly that WPA auth sm assoc call succeeded
Verify that association processing did not end up freeing the state
machine. This should not really happen in practice, but better verify
it anyway.
2010-01-10 21:45:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b2180f4a89 Check WPS attr build helper return value
These are hardcoded to return success, but should check the value
anyway.
2010-01-10 20:49:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0e75b3c352 Use zero address when reporting unknown peer in SMK error
This avoids potential use of uninitialized stack memory when printing
out peer address based on SMK error message that does not include the
MAC address.
2010-01-10 19:00:25 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e4a6ea1d9c Avoid a theoretical use-after-free in WPA auth sm init
wpa_sm_step() could theoretically free the statemachine, but it does
not do it in this particular case. Anyway, the code can be cleaned to
verify whether the state machine data is still available after the
wpa_sm_step() call.
2010-01-10 18:54:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
612162430f WPS: Remove unused mac_addr_text parameter from get_netif_info() 2010-01-09 16:57:15 +02:00
Masashi Honma
c610dba137 FreeBSD: Fix driver_bsd.c build
On FreeBSD 8.0, driver_bsd.c build fails because of changes from
older versions of FreeBSD. The error messages are below:

In file included from ../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:38:
/usr/include/net80211/ieee80211_crypto.h:94: error: 'IEEE80211_TID_SIZE'
undeclared here (not in a function)
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c: In function 'wpa_driver_bsd_set_wpa_ie':
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:968: error: 'IEEE80211_IOC_OPTIE' undeclared (first
use in this function)
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:968: error: (Each undeclared identifier is reported
only once
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:968: error: for each function it appears in.)
gmake: *** [../src/drivers/driver_bsd.o] Error 1

This patch solves this issue.
2010-01-09 11:04:44 +02:00
Masashi Honma
953f0f6333 bsd: Add support for WPA_TRACE and WPA_TRACE_BFD
On FreeBSD 8.0, WPA_TRACE and WPA_TRACE_BFD functionality build fails.
2010-01-09 11:01:12 +02:00
Masashi Honma
60e1ce7615 bsd: Fix driver_wired.c build 2010-01-09 10:53:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1056dad796 Fix PKCS#12 use with OpenSSL 1.0.0
Add 40-bit RC2 CBC explicitly since OpenSSL 1.0.0 does not seem to that
anymore with PKCS12_PBE_add(). Furthermore, at least 1.0.0-beta4 crashes
if the needed cipher is not registered when parsing the PKCS#12 data
(this crashing part should be fixed in newer 1.0.0 versions)

Following bug reports are related to the issue:
https://bugzilla.redhat.com/show_bug.cgi?id=541924
https://bugzilla.redhat.com/show_bug.cgi?id=538851
http://rt.openssl.org/Ticket/Display.html?id=2127
http://rt.openssl.org/Ticket/Display.html?id=2128
2010-01-09 00:38:09 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c5b26e33c1 Convert RSN pre-authentication to use struct dl_list 2010-01-06 21:23:15 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1ce77dcc66 Fix memory leak on RSN preauth init error path 2010-01-06 21:14:09 +02:00
Lennert Buytenhek
594cf8b9ef Fix WMM default parameters
wmm_ac_??_cw{min,max} parameters are in log form

When the wme_ac_??_cw{min,max} parameters aren't specified in
hostapd.conf, hostapd uses an incorrect set of default values, as the
defaults are in 2^x-1 form instead of in log form.  This patch changes
them over to the expected log form.
2010-01-06 20:48:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0de4da91c1 Mark fmt parameter const for wpa_printf/msg 2010-01-04 19:16:19 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3adca61c9c nl80211: Fix a typo 2010-01-03 22:20:27 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2ac9688eb8 Use common driver code for Linux hwaddr get/set 2010-01-03 22:17:08 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
34f2f814e0 Share a single Linux ioctl helper fo setting interface up/down
Number of Linux driver wrappers included this more or less identical
function, so lets add a new helper file to be able to share some more
code between the driver wrappers.
2010-01-03 22:08:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
69378b7928 bsd: Fix a typo 2010-01-03 21:18:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
abd9fafab6 Standardize on a single definition of auth_alg bitfield values 2010-01-03 21:14:40 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
70f8cc8ec8 Share the same enum for MFP configuration
The three existing enums were already depending on using the same
values in couple of places and it is just simpler to standardize on
one of these to avoid need for mapping between different enums for
the exact same thing.
2010-01-03 21:02:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e049867788 More Doxygen documentation for the driver interface 2010-01-03 20:49:48 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d1f9c410c1 Remove src/drivers/scan_helpers.c
Most of this file was already moved into wpa_supplicant/scan.c and
we can remove the file completely by having couple of small helper
functions copied to the remaining users outside core wpa_supplicant
code.
2010-01-03 20:27:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
9ba9fa07cc Move wpa_supplicant specific scan code away from src/drivers
This fits better in wpa_supplicant/scan.c. Couple of remaining
scan_helpers.c functions are currently used in driver wrappers,
but they can likely be removed in the future.
2010-01-03 18:48:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
baac649094 Add drv_event_eapol_rx() helper 2010-01-03 18:35:01 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1d041bec84 Use generic driver event notification for AP mode assoc/disassoc 2010-01-03 18:22:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a8e0505bf0 Use driver event, EVENT_EAPOL_RX, for EAPOL frame indication 2010-01-03 17:44:40 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a70a5d6d06 Replace hostapd_notif_new_sta() with new driver event, EVENT_NEW_STA 2010-01-03 16:46:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b38ddb0c50 driver_test: Add channel awareness for the MLME test code
This allows the MLME mode of driver_test to filter frames based on
the frequency on which they were sent and the frequency used by the
receiver.
2010-01-03 14:01:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
55777702cd Add driver API functionality for off-channel Action frames
This adds new commands and events for allowing off-channel Action
frame exchanges to be requested. This functionality is not yet used
and is only fully supported by driver_test.c at this point.
driver_nl80211.c has support for the remain-on-channel commands, but
the Action frame TX/RX part is still pending review for the kernel
code and as such, is not yet included here.
2010-01-03 13:57:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d7c53e432b Sync with wireless-testing.git linux/nl80211.h 2010-01-03 13:56:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7bfc47c34f Add driver ops for allocating interface addresses
This adds placeholder code for allowing the virtual interfaces to be
pre-allocated a MAC address before the interface type is known with
drivers that do not handle interface type changes.
2010-01-03 13:42:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
504e905c6e Add a driver op for enabling Probe Request reporting in station mode 2010-01-03 13:30:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
9646a8ab8b Remove unnecessary wpa_event_type typedef 2010-01-03 13:10:12 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2a8b74163e Move struct hostapd_frame_info definition away from driver API
This is internal data structure for hostapd/AP functionality and does
not need to be defined in driver.h.
2010-01-03 12:37:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3af1f9cb14 driver_test: Remove forgotten, unused prototypes 2010-01-03 12:36:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0d9fc3d8bd Remove struct ieee80211_hdr dependency from EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN
It is simpler to just pass in u8* to the beginning of the header.
2010-01-03 12:17:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a0e0d3bb15 Replace hostapd_probe_req_rx() with EVENT_RX_PROBE_REQ driver event 2010-01-03 12:11:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
245519e0cd Replace wpa_supplicant_sta_rx() call with driver event
Get rid of wpa_supplicant_sta_rx() and add a new driver event that is
marked to be used only with driver_test.c. In addition, remove this
functionality from privsep wrapper. This is only use for client mode
MLME testing with driver_test.c.
2010-01-03 11:50:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8d923a4acf Only expire scanned BSSes based on new scan results
Get more information about scans when updating BSS table information.
This allows the missing-from-scans expiration rule to work properly
when only partial set of channels or SSIDs are being scanned.
2010-01-02 13:57:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
dc5a08c053 WPS: Fix Probe Request processing to handle missing attribute
WPS IE parsing for PBC mode did not check whether the UUID-E attribute
was included before dereferencing the pointer. This could result in the
AP crashing when processing and invalid Probe Request frame.
2010-01-01 23:38:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
291b60682a nl80211/wext: Hardcode all auth_algs as supported
There does not seem to be a driver interface for fetching auth_algs
capability, but this may be used by some external application, so
hardcode all auth_algs as supported for now.
2010-01-01 21:41:19 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c2f5126941 WPS: Add Enrollee-seen event message and wpa_gui-qt4 Peers entry
This can be used to show active Enrollees in AP mode to make it
easier to provision a new device.
2009-12-28 16:24:04 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2e8542756c Mark wpabuf_get_trace() static 2009-12-28 16:02:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d2b8812921 Include header file to verify prototypes 2009-12-28 16:01:21 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
139a33f34e test: Register more complete set of channels and rates 2009-12-28 13:39:57 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2fe17720aa test: Use previously requested BSSID when adding a new interface 2009-12-28 13:38:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c6e8e8e41f nl80211: Add more debug prints for mode changes and interface add/remove 2009-12-28 13:25:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4832ecd754 Add an option for driver wrappers to report operational frequency 2009-12-28 13:23:13 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
cd7d80f373 Allow Probe Request callbacks to terminate iteration 2009-12-28 13:14:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1c08f8c0f0 Allocate Probe Response and Beacon buffers based on WPS IE length
This IE is of variable length and it is better to allocate the frame
buffer taking this length into account to prepare for future
additions.
2009-12-28 12:58:27 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f0d126d339 Add ctrl_iface events for BSS added/removed 2009-12-28 00:42:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f7c4783379 Split hostapd_interface_deinit() into deinit and free parts
This allows the driver interface to be deinitialized before
struct hostapd_data instance gets freed. This needs to be done so
that the driver wrapper does not maintain a context pointer to
freed memory.
2009-12-27 21:31:13 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f78feb6a72 test: Add WPA_TRACE reference check for driver ctx
This will catch too early freeing of the context pointer before the
driver wrapper has been deinitialized.
2009-12-27 21:20:25 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
60ad2c7bef Fix a typo in a doxygen comment 2009-12-27 17:13:15 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
459489c99d eloop: Fix timeout handler to use local copy of func pointer
We need to copy not only the context pointers, but also the function
pointer before the timeout gets freed.
2009-12-26 14:30:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
719347511a Get rid of unnecessary typedefs for enums. 2009-12-26 10:35:08 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
81f4f6195e Include header files explicitly in *.c, not via header files 2009-12-26 00:31:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6e6e8c31ff Replace src/ap/driver_i.h with non-inlined functions in ap_drv_ops.c 2009-12-26 00:21:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8b06c1ed0d Remove ap_config.h dependency from driver_i.h
This adds explicit #include line for ap_config.h into the src/ap/*.c
files that actually use the definitions from there.
2009-12-26 00:12:25 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6226e38d00 Rename some src/ap files to avoid duplicate file names
Doxygen and some build tools may get a bit confused about same file
name being used in different directories. Clean this up a bit by
renaming some of the duplicated file names in src/ap.
2009-12-26 00:05:40 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1b56c26c40 Get rid of direct hostapd_for_each_interface() calls
src/ap/*.c must not call functions in hostapd or wpa_supplicant
directories directly, so avoid this by using a callback function
pointer.
2009-12-25 20:12:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
70db2ab308 Move rest of the generic AP mode functionality into src/ap 2009-12-25 20:06:07 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
481a11c94f test: Use more shared code for driver wrapper AP and station modes
This fixes AP mode use in wpa_supplicant with the
no-AP-driver-wrapper design.
2009-12-25 19:48:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a911a6e61f Do not use virtual driver_ops for wpa_supplicant AP mode
Initialize struct hostapd_data driver context with the same driver
information that was initialized earlier during wpa_supplicant start.
This allows the AP mode operations to be completed directly with the
same calls in AP code without having to maintain a separate translation
layer between the AP and station mode driver context.
2009-12-25 19:47:08 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a4f2110934 Clean up some of the hostapd.h function prototype definitions
Not all prototypes in hostapd.h really belong there. This is an initial
step in cleaning that up.
2009-12-25 14:20:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0aef3ec832 Move hostapd_prune_associations() into ap/utils.c 2009-12-25 14:06:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2586bc64d0 Move authentication server setup into separate file 2009-12-25 13:43:43 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ad44e244b1 Move iapp.c into src/ap 2009-12-25 13:04:45 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0e2d35c614 Move ctrl_iface_ap.c into src/ap 2009-12-25 12:25:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
64ee63a0d8 wired: Use os_*() wrappers more consistently
Need to allocate and free memory with same style to avoid WPA_TRACE
errors.
2009-12-25 11:54:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
65668bfb77 Add forgotten src/ap/utils.c file
Commit 32da61d9c9 was supposed to add
this file.
2009-12-25 01:31:28 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
9fdeaf8f3a WPS: Fix a memory leak if set_ie_cb() is not set
Skip WPS IE building for Beacon and Probe Response frames is set_ie_cb()
is not set. This fixes a memory leak and optimizes operations by not
allocating memory and building the WPS IEs unnecessarily.
2009-12-25 01:29:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
32da61d9c9 Move wps_hostapd.c into src/ap 2009-12-25 01:26:37 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1057d78eb8 Move generic AP functionality implementation into src/ap
This code can be shared by both hostapd and wpa_supplicant and this
is an initial step in getting the generic code moved to be under the
src directories. Couple of generic files still remain under the
hostapd directory due to direct dependencies to files there. Once the
dependencies have been removed, they will also be moved to the src/ap
directory to allow wpa_supplicant to be built without requiring anything
from the hostapd directory.
2009-12-25 01:12:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a2de634d1c Removed hostapd_new_assoc_sta() from driver wrapper API
This is not called directly by any of the driver wrappers anymore, so
the function can be removed from driver.h and drv_callbacks.c.
2009-12-24 23:30:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
14f7938660 Merge driver ops set_wps_beacon_ie and set_wps_probe_resp_ie
set_ap_wps_ie() is not used to set WPS IE for both Beacon and Probe
Response frames with a single call. In addition, struct wpabuf is used
instead of separate u8* and length fields. This avoids duplicated
allocation of the IEs and simplifies code in general.
2009-12-24 19:46:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
9aca440199 Drop WPA_TRACE reference before eloop timeout handler call
This avoids bogus error reports for cases where the timeout handler
frees the memory that was pointed to by the eloop timeout context.
2009-12-24 12:41:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1b9eb51bbd Enable IPv6 support for libutils.a and libradius.a 2009-12-24 12:27:42 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6aa9e7a64a Redesign struct hostapd_ip_addr to be of fixed size
This structure is embedded in some other structures and as such, it
would be nicer if this would not change its length based on build
options.
2009-12-24 12:26:47 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
64ce68fc42 Comment out CONFIG_IPV6 for now in RADIUS library build
This needs to be used consistently in order to get correct size for
struct hostapd_ip_addr.
2009-12-24 12:18:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8a404b598d Add build rules for src/radius/libradius.a 2009-12-24 11:59:08 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
fbbfcbac29 hostapd: Add WDS (4-address frame) mode with per-station interfaces
This mode allows associated stations to use 4-address frames to allow
layer 2 bridging to be used. At least for the time being, this is only
supported with driver=nl80211.
2009-12-24 11:46:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
09eac1ac56 nl80211: Sync with wireless-testing.git linux/nl80211.h 2009-12-24 11:07:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2a29f0d45c Rename EAP TLS variables to make server and peer code consistent 2009-12-24 00:16:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5e5223bf29 trace: Show eloop unregistered handler function name/file/line 2009-12-22 01:52:48 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
94caf8cd62 trace: Filter out uninteresting functions from backtrace
This filters out the functions inside trace.c and functions before
main() since those are not relevant to the actual issue that is being
reported.
2009-12-22 01:29:15 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a6ff0e0810 trace: Add active reference tracking
This WPA_TRACE=y additions allows components to register active references
to memory that has been provided to them as a pointer. If such an actively
referenced memory area is freed, tracer will report this as an error and
backtraces of both the invalid free and the location where this pointer
was marked referenced are shown.
2009-12-22 01:11:15 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a698d28415 Check fread return value 2009-12-21 23:17:53 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7bf127572c nl80211: Use couple more os_*() wrappers for allocation 2009-12-21 22:32:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e62fb0a0de nl80211: Use os_* allocation wrappers to avoid WPA_TRACE issues 2009-12-21 22:21:10 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c0e4dd9eeb WPS: Make Config Methods configurable for wpa_supplicant
This adds config_methods configuration option for wpa_supplicant
following the design used in hostapd. In addition, the string is
now parsed in common code from src/wps/wps_common.c and the list
of configurable methods include all the defined methods from
WPS 1.0h spec.
2009-12-21 15:59:25 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b64576fcf5 WPS: Prefer PSK format if Enrollee does not advertise Display
Since an Enrollee that does not advertise display as one of the
Config Methods is unlikely to be able to show the ASCII passphrase
to the user, prefer PSK format with such an Enrollee to reduce key
derivation time. This can help with some low-powered devices that
would take long time to derive the PSK from the passphrase.
2009-12-21 12:58:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f3f2eeba01 WPS: Add option for forcing Registrar to use PSK format in Credential
The use_psk_key parameter can now be used to force the Registrar to
use PSK format instead of ASCII passphrase when building a Credential
for the Enrollee. For now, this is not enabled, but it could be enabled
either based on external (to WPS) configuration or automatically set
based on some WPS attribute values from the Enrollee.
2009-12-21 12:46:19 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f2f7d965b8 Add option libbfd support for tracing code
CONFIG_WPA_TRACE=y and CONFIG_WPA_TRACE_BFD=y can now be used to get
even more complete symbols (func/file/line and inline functions) for
backtraces.
2009-12-20 23:35:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b763863d97 GnuTLS: Implement tls_connection_enable_workaround() 2009-12-20 22:08:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
9dd37a224b GnuTLS: Add support for piggybacked Application Data 2009-12-20 22:07:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c9a7bbe5a8 GnuTLS: Define empty tls_connection_set_session_ticket_cb()
This allows EAP-FAST build to be completed even if it does not actually
work yet with GnuTLS.
2009-12-20 21:37:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
496c5d981e Use wpabuf with tls_connection_ia_send_phase_finished() 2009-12-20 21:33:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2944656925 Allow TLS flags to be configured (allow MD5, disable time checks)
Undocumented (at least for the time being) TLS parameters can now
be provided in wpa_supplicant configuration to enable some workarounds
for being able to connect insecurely to some networks. phase1 and
phase2 network parameters can use following options:
tls_allow_md5=1
- allow MD5 signature to be used (disabled by default with GnuTLS)
tls_disable_time_checks=1
- ignore certificate expiration time

For now, only the GnuTLS TLS wrapper implements support for these.
2009-12-20 19:28:47 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4a1e97790d GnuTLS: Report certificate validation failures with TLS alert
In addition, show more detailed reason for the failure in debug log.
2009-12-20 19:14:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a86a7316a4 OpenSSL: Fix memleak in previous wpabuf changes on an error path 2009-12-20 19:12:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2574634b7f Check TLS status on EAP server during handshake
The new TLS wrapper use may end up returning alert data and we need to
make sure here that it does not end up getting interpreted as success
due to non-NULL response.
2009-12-20 19:11:43 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
074be2332f GnuTLS: Use struct wpabuf for push/pull buffers 2009-12-20 18:31:56 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
81c85c069a Convert TLS wrapper to use struct wpabuf
This converts tls_connection_handshake(),
tls_connection_server_handshake(), tls_connection_encrypt(), and
tls_connection_decrypt() to use struct wpa_buf to allow higher layer
code to be cleaned up with consistent struct wpabuf use.
2009-12-20 18:17:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
94c3e91fc5 Add empty FIPS PRF wrapper for CryptoAPI 2009-12-20 18:14:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8f431bc808 Add empty crypto_mod_exp() wrapper for CryptoAPI. 2009-12-20 18:13:42 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
de979ef18c Fix MinGW build: CertCreateCertificateContext() is now known 2009-12-20 18:10:10 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f266d1a162 eloop_win: Fix build after eloop user_data removal 2009-12-20 17:48:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f52ab9e6b0 Fix lastReqData freeing to use wpabuf_free() 2009-12-20 17:22:25 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
eeb04821ad wpabuf: Add WPA_TRACE code to validate correct freeing of wpabuf
Use an extra header to move the returned pointer to break os_free()
or free() of the returned value and verify that the correct magic
is present when freeing or resizing the wpabuf. Show backtrace on
invalid wpabuf use.
2009-12-20 13:11:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
859db534bf wpabuf: Allow wpabuf_resize(NULL, len) to be used
This matches with realloc() usage, i.e., allocate a new buffer if no
buffer was specified.
2009-12-20 12:52:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c479e41f53 EAP-FAST server: Piggyback Phase 2 start with end of Phase 1
If Finished message from peer has been received before the server
Finished message, start Phase 2 with the same message to avoid extra
roundtrip when the peer does not have anything to send after the server
Finished message.
2009-12-20 11:39:45 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1a1bf008cb WPS ER: Delay wpa_supplicant termination to allow unsubscription
Instead of forcefully deinitializing ER immediately, give it some
time to complete unsubscription and call eloop_terminate() only once
ER code has completed its work.
2009-12-19 23:47:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e46338fc76 WPS ER: Unsubscribe from AP events whenever removing the AP entry
Store the subscription identifier during subscription process and use
this to unsubscribe from events when removing the AP.
2009-12-19 23:20:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
187533a4c5 WPS: Convert Registrar PIN list to use struct dl_list 2009-12-19 22:26:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
96f5234735 WPS ER: Convert lists to use struct dl_list 2009-12-19 22:14:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
45767a9597 WPS: Remove unused net_if copy 2009-12-19 21:58:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
eeb49f991b driver_test: Use OS wrappers consistently for memory allocation 2009-12-19 21:49:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
fb4baa688b Add memory allocation analyzer to verify OS wrapper use
WPA_TRACE=y builds will now verify that memory allocation in done
consistently using os_{zalloc,malloc,realloc,strdup,free} (i.e., no
mixing of os_* functions and unwrapper functions). In addition, some
common memory allocation issues (double-free, memory leaks, etc.) are
detected automatically.
2009-12-19 21:47:56 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f45fb672cc eloop: Do not use printf() or fprintf() directly 2009-12-19 20:27:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
eaa3f04b97 eloop: Use struct dl_list for timeouts 2009-12-19 20:26:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0456ea16d8 eloop: Remove global user data pointer
This is not really needed since all signal handlers can use a context
pointer provided during signal handler registration.
2009-12-19 19:22:16 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2988796257 Fix RADIUS client to cancel IPv6 socket read notifications 2009-12-19 18:52:42 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f481459f5e Fix RADIUS server deinit to cancel timeout for session removal 2009-12-19 18:52:15 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
930f704aac Add backtrace support for debugging
WPA_TRACE=y can now be used to enable internal backtrace support that
will provide more details about implementation errors, e.g., when some
resources are not released correctly. In addition, this will print out
a backtrace automatically if SIGSEGV is received.
2009-12-19 18:40:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1489e11a94 Make struct radius_msg private to radius.c
This is internal data structure for RADIUS message handling and
external code should not touch it directly.
2009-12-19 17:26:57 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
aa235d2ef7 Convert RADIUS message code to use wpabuf internally 2009-12-19 17:12:07 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
9e7245bdb4 Change radius_msg_free() to free the buffer
Since all callers were freeing the buffer immediately anyway, move
this operation into radius_msg_free() to reduce code size.
2009-12-19 16:34:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d94f86d85e RADIUS message initialization cleanup 2009-12-19 16:20:53 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d04a96b0d6 Add documentation for RADIUS code and some minor cleanup 2009-12-19 16:13:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a9f92c487f WPS: Remove parent pointer from advertisement state machine 2009-12-19 14:51:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
158aff0035 WPS: Convert struct advertisement_state_machine to use struct dl_list 2009-12-19 14:46:52 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ea8f09acb2 WPS: Remove unused struct subscr_addr parent pointer 2009-12-19 14:30:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f1de40f728 WPS: Convert struct wps_event_ to use struct dl_list 2009-12-19 14:29:01 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ec32c29471 WPS: Convert struct subscription to use struct dl_list 2009-12-19 14:15:43 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f98b440c47 WPS: Convert struct subscr_addr to use dl_list 2009-12-19 13:47:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
dacf478352 Add generic doubly-linked list implementation 2009-12-19 13:43:25 +02:00
Masashi Honma
1c9c03d08d Mac OS X: Fix driver_osx.c build 2009-12-18 21:25:21 +02:00
Snowpin Lee
649b28f9e6 ralink: Add WPS support 2009-12-18 21:04:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a6fc4f3c82 Change Linux driver wrappers to use shared netlink receive code 2009-12-18 18:24:13 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
62d680c3ca netlink: Move more of the newlink/dellink parsing into shared code 2009-12-18 17:49:07 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f37cf89ccb netlink: Use NLMSG_OK and NLMSG_NEXT macros 2009-12-18 17:22:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
08063178fb nl80211/wext: Share netlink new/del link event receive code 2009-12-18 17:11:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e2d02c29b5 driver_nl80211/wext: Share netlink operstate send function
As an initial step in sharing netlink helper functions among driver
wrappers, create a new file for netlink code and move operstate send
function there.
2009-12-18 16:35:33 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3b31db5199 Fix netlink payload length calculation
nlmsghdr length needs to be removed from payload length. [Bug 341]
2009-12-18 16:14:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
67f0112d83 driver_test: Fix AP mode to initialize bss_ctx for first interface 2009-12-16 16:01:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
cdc7f66bda Fix driver_nl80211.c build without CONFIG_CLIENT_MLME 2009-12-14 21:13:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d986b1b6c1 OpenSSL: Silence "Failed to read possible Application Data"
This message from tls_connection_handshake() is not really an error in
most cases, so do not show it if there was indeed no Application Data
available (which is a normal scenario and not an indication of any
error).
2009-12-14 16:09:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b57e086cc1 Mark management frame processing functions to use const buffer 2009-12-13 23:25:30 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ba091c06c5 Mark ieee802_11_parse_elems() input and parsed elems const
In addition, re-order IE pointers and u8 length so that the shorter
length fields are together to allow compiler to optimize structure size.
2009-12-13 23:11:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f8b1f69561 Use generic driver events for TX status and RX reporting
Replace driver wrapper calls to hostapd_tx_status(),
hostapd_rx_from_unknown_sta(), hostapd_mgmt_rx(), and
hostapd_mgmt_tx_cb() with new generic driver events
EVENT_TX_STATUS, EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN, and EVENT_RX_MGMT.

This cleans up lot of the driver wrapper code to be less dependent
on whether it is being used within wpa_supplicant AP mode or hostapd.
2009-12-13 23:05:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1b648c7e1a nl80211: Remove some of the unnecessary conditional compilation
These functions can be built for both hostapd and wpa_supplicant.
2009-12-13 21:49:53 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
fcf0f87d97 Replace hostapd_button_pushed() with generic driver event 2009-12-13 21:21:10 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1cd973d501 Replace hostapd_michael_mic_failure() with generic driver event 2009-12-13 21:17:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
85cc05110d driver_test: Merge drv->hapd into drv->ctx
A separate struct hostapd_data pointer is not really needed anymore
and the generic context pointer can be used instead.
2009-12-13 18:57:57 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8043e72589 Add BSS ctx to if_add() driver op
This remove the need from driver_test.c to go through internal hostapd
structures to find the appropriate BSS when reporting events on secondary
BSSes.
2009-12-13 18:54:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0de39516ae Map STA flags into values defined in driver.h
This removes need for including hostapd/sta_flags.h into driver
wrappers and removes any remaining dependencies between driver flags
and internal hostapd flags.
2009-12-13 11:35:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
60c8cfb4fb Remove usused flags parameter from sta_add() driver op 2009-12-13 11:05:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c9b9e494fc driver_bsd: Fix build after previous commit 2009-12-12 23:55:09 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
af586419fd Add more WPA/IEEE 802.1X parameters into set_ieee8021x() driver op
This gets rid of the need to touch internal hostapd data structures
directly from the driver wrappers.
2009-12-12 23:50:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ff2a74eeb1 driver_bsd: Fix build (eapol_sm.h is not needed anymore) 2009-12-12 23:33:43 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e3bd3912ca Change set_ieee8021x driver op to use parameters structure
This makes it easier to extent the set of parameters passed to
this driver wrapper function.
2009-12-12 23:32:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
08fd8c15a0 Replace direct driver call to wpa_ft_rrb_rx() with driver event
This avoids need to include hostapd/wpa.h into the driver wrappers.
2009-12-12 22:43:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c779b04ab6 driver_wired: Share multicast membership add/drop function 2009-12-12 22:18:37 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
caf005b0fe driver_wired: Remove unneeded conditional building blocks 2009-12-12 22:07:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
50b5bf4eda Remove obsolete Prism54.org driver support (driver_prism54.c)
The Prism54.org project seems have been dead for a while and it does not
look like this driver would ever be maintained again. Furthermore, it is
difficult to find a version that would work with the driver_prism54.c
wrapper and there is another driver for these card in the Linux kernel
tree.

The hostapd integration in driver_prism54.c is quite different from the
other driver wrappers and would require major effort to get it cleaned
up. Since there does not seem to be any real users for the cleaned up
version, there does not seem to be justification to spend this effort on
the wrapper. This old code is making it much more difficult to clean up
the driver interface and at this point, the best option seems to be to
remove the driver wrappers. Should someone really still need this, the
old code will continue to be available in hostapd 0.6.x.
2009-12-12 20:52:12 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0531006644 driver_wired: Move STA entry processing away from driver wrapper
Get rid of hostapd/sta_info.h dependency by introducing a new driver
callback function for hostapd.
2009-12-12 20:39:25 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7e683ceeb4 WPS: Handle Selected Registrar as a union of info from all Registrars
Instead of using the latest selected registrar change, collect selected
registrar information separately from all registrars and use the union
of this information when building the WPS IE for Beacon and Probe
Response frames.

Note: SetSelectedRegistrar UPnP action does not include a unique
identifier, so the ER matching routine is based only on the IP address
of the ER. In theory, there could be multiple ERs using the same IP
address (but different port or URL), so there may be some corner cases
that would not always match the correct ER entry at the AP. Anyway, this
is not really expected to occur in normal use cases and even if it did
happen, the selected registrar information is not any worse than it was
before when only the last change from any registrar for being
advertized.
2009-12-12 16:54:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6a029035f5 WPS: Move POST URL validation into web_connection_parse_post()
This is more logical location for checking the URL and potentially
handling a call to another URL handler. In addition, return 404 error,
not invalid UPnP action, if the URL does not match.
2009-12-12 16:48:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ed74dcd512 WPS: Remove an obsolete comment about UPnP actions and callbacks 2009-12-12 16:48:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5e9c730a2b WPS: Remove unnecessary GetDevice and PutMessage callbacks
These callbacks can be handled internally within core WPS code, so there
is no need to go through wps_hostapd.c with a callback function that is
just calling back into the core WPS code.
2009-12-12 16:47:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d0d45d8276 WPS: Remove unnecessary SetSelectedRegistrar callback
This can be handled internally within core WPS code, so there is no
need to go through wps_hostapd.c with a callback function that is just
calling back into the core WPS code.
2009-12-12 16:46:33 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
9008a3e44d Merge get_seqnum_igtk() driver op with get_seqnum()
IEEE 802.11w uses distinct key indexes (4 and 5) so the same
get_seqnum() handler can be used to fetch packet number for both
TKIP/CCMP and BIP(using IGTK).

Since the new get_seqnum_igtk() handler was not actually implemented by
any driver wrapper, this may also fix BIP/IGTK sequence number reporting
with driver_nl80211.c.
2009-12-11 00:15:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
90b8c4c5f8 Add Doxygen comments for rest of struct wpa_driver_ops members
All members have now at least minimal documentation.
2009-12-10 21:11:33 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6fe8296197 Move vendor-specific IE type defines away from driver.h
These are generic IEEE 802.11 defines and do not really need to be in
the driver interface specific header file.
2009-12-10 12:27:46 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
15333707d5 Add more documentation for driver ops 2009-12-10 01:21:01 +02:00
Masashi Honma
bab31499fd EAP-TTLS/PAP: User-Password obfuscation for zero length password
The password in User-Password AVP is padded to a multiple of 16 bytes
on EAP-TTLS/PAP. But when the password length is zero, no padding is
added. It doesn't cause connectivity issue. In fact, I could connect
with hostapd RADIUS server with zero length password.

I think it's better for obfuscation to pad the 16 bytes data when the
password length is zero with this patch.
2009-12-09 23:42:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3484a18a13 hostapd: Remove unused bridge_packets configuration option
There was code for configuring this, but no driver wrapper actually
implements the actual setting. Remove this for now to reduce potential
confusion and to simply the driver interface.
2009-12-09 22:06:43 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
fb7842aa51 Remove struct hostapd_rate_data from driver API
In addition to the bitrate, the only other variable in this structure
is used internally in hostapd. Move this structure into hostapd.h and
make the driver API use simpler data structure (array of bitrates).
2009-12-09 21:57:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
217e7eeaf0 Remove unused rate flags from driver use
These are not really used and can be removed to clean up the driver
interface definition. The only remaining flag (HOSTAPD_RATE_BASIC) can
be removed once the basic rate set indication can be handled
differently.
2009-12-09 21:38:14 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
22a7c9d735 Merge bss_add/bss_remove drivers ops into if_add/if_remove
if_add/if_remove can now be used as the generic driver ops for adding
and removing virtual interfaces of various types. In addition,
driver_nl80211.c is now including this code unconditionally, so that
the functions are not limited only for hostapd.
2009-12-09 16:49:28 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b5996353e7 Remove unused if_update() driver op 2009-12-09 15:47:20 +02:00
Masashi Honma
2a91091e15 Fix driver_bsd.c build
On NetBSD 5.0.1, driver_bsd.c build fails with message below.

../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c: In function 'wpa_driver_bsd_associate':
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:1170: warning: implicit declaration of function 'wpa_driver_bsd_set_auth_alg'
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c: At top level:
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:1204: error: static declaration of 'wpa_driver_bsd_set_auth_alg' follows non-static declaration
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:1170: error: previous implicit declaration of 'wpa_driver_bsd_set_auth_alg' was here
gmake: *** [../src/drivers/driver_bsd.o] Error 1

This patch solves this issue.
2009-12-07 21:35:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
644a8f2208 Remove unused phytype RX info variable 2009-12-06 18:54:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5c90d47657 Move EAP-SIM DB conditional build into hostapd 2009-12-06 18:23:53 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
74784010af Remove conditional no-RADIUS build from src/radius
Make it responsibility of the src/radius user to handle conditional
build rules.
2009-12-06 17:53:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ab7ddc74ad Move asn1_test.c into tests subdirectory and split it in two
The new test-asn1 and test-x509 tools are built using libraries
from src/{utils,crypto,tls}. Currently, cross dependencies between
crypto and tls are still preventing the test-x509 from being linked
properly.
2009-12-06 16:45:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0e574b07f8 Move hlr_auc_gw into hostapd directory
This is a separate program and is used mainly with hostapd, so it is
better to move this into the hostapd subdirectory now that Milenage
code has already been moved into src/crypto. Milenage was the only
generic component in hlr_auc_gw.
2009-12-06 16:33:19 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
912321e935 Add rules for building src/tls/libtls.a and use it with eap_example
eap_example is now using src/crypto/libcrypto.a and src/tls/libtls.a
instead of providing own rules for building the files for these
components. TLS library selection is temporarily disabled for
eap_example (it will be built using internal crypto/TLS), but the
configuration option for this will eventually be restored with a new
libcrypto.a configuration option.
2009-12-06 16:27:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e77e0a8320 Include functionality to support EAP-FAST unconditionally
Clean up the internal TLS implementation by removing conditional
build blocks for (mostly) EAP-FAST specific functionality. This
will increase the size a big for non-EAP-FAST builds, but is quite
helpful in making src/tls/libtls.a with single build options. If
the potential size reduction is considered significant in the future,
this can be reconsider with a more library compatible way (e.g.,
external file with registration function, etc.).
2009-12-06 16:20:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1a70777868 Remove unneeded CONFIG_INTERNAL_X509 and NEED_SHA256 defines 2009-12-06 16:19:13 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
be473f3f09 Split crypto_internal.c into parts to clean up build
This makes it easier to make src/libcrypto.a and only link in
code that is really used.
2009-12-06 14:37:46 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
507d87930c Fix rsn_preauth_scan_result() inline wrapper for no-EAP builds 2009-12-06 14:29:12 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4bb1228e1c Use thin archives to allow libraries to be merged
This allows libeap.a and libeap.so to be built by merging in multiple
libraries from src subdirectories. In addition, this avoids wasting
extra space and time for local builds.
2009-12-06 13:49:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f721aed4b1 Increase EAP server extra room for encryption overhead (for GnuTLS)
This fixes issues with some GnuTLS versions that seem to be adding
quite a bit of extra data into TLS messages. The EAP server code is
now using the same 300 byte extra room that was already used in the
EAP peer implementation.
2009-12-06 12:02:28 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
127608152e Move EAP method registration away from src/eap_{peer,server}
This makes it easier to make a library out of EAP methods without
losing possiblity of binary size optimization by linker dropping
unreferenced code.
2009-12-06 11:28:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2d106f21aa Remove unnecessary defines
The following defines are not really needed in most places, so
remove them to clean up source code and build scripts:
EAP_TLS_FUNCS
EAP_TLS_OPENSSL
EAP_TLS_GNUTLS
CONFIG_TLS_INTERNAL
2009-12-05 22:51:08 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
36ee258db7 Add forgotten files into libcrypto.a 2009-12-05 22:25:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
631afd993f Add rules for building src/crypto as a library
For now, this is hardcoded to support only the internal crypto
implementation.
2009-12-05 22:03:46 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6a230ba274 Add build rules for building a library from src/utils files
This is an initial step on providing an alternative build system that
uses libraries from src subdirectories.
2009-12-05 21:39:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
953f83439b Move Milenage test code into the new tests directory 2009-12-05 21:14:08 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
43df4cc2ca Move milenage.[ch] into src/crypto 2009-12-05 21:00:52 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1801bd7fae Move base64 test code into a new tests subdirectory 2009-12-05 20:43:07 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a95795ad61 nl80211: Add extra IEs into IBSS join request
This allows RSN IE to be added into Beacon and Probe Response frames
when using RSN IBSS.
2009-12-04 22:20:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5cc4d64bf2 nl80211: Add support for IBSS networks 2009-12-04 00:15:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
362bd35f2d Add more Doxygen documentation for RADIUS server implementation 2009-12-02 21:29:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d72aad942b nl80211: Clear BSS state mismatches with deauth as a workaround
There seem to be some cases in which wpa_supplicant and
cfg80211/mac80211 seem to have different understanding on
authentication/association state. Since cfg80211/mac80211 is very strict
on when it accepts new authentication/association/scan commands, try our
best at clearing such state mismatches by explicitly deauthenticating
from BSSes with which the driver claims we are associated with if we do
not have local information about such association.
2009-12-02 17:54:57 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e6b8efeba0 nl80211: Add debug prints for BSS status in scan results
Print what the kernel believes the current BSS status (authenticated
or associated) is in scan results. In addition, check whether this
matches with the state that wpa_supplicant believes the driver to be
in.

This does not change the actual behavior, but will provide information
that will help in debugging potential issues where cfg80211/mac80211
seems to get into a different state from wpa_supplicant. In addition,
this provides an easy location for a workaround that could be added to
clear cfg80211/mac80211 state for unknown BSSes.
2009-12-02 16:45:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e0e14a7bc3 Move internal EAPOL authenticator defines into their own file
This is an initial step in further cleaning up the EAPOL authenticator
use to avoid requiring direct accesses to the internal data structures.
For now, number of external files are still including the internal
definitions from eapol_auth_sm_i.h, but eventually, these direct
references should be removed.
2009-11-29 23:16:04 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
03da66bd59 Remove src/crypto from default include path
In addition, start ordering header file includes to be in more
consistent order: system header files, src/utils, src/*, same
directory as the *.c file.
2009-11-29 23:04:43 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ffa2a30e33 Add Makefile for the new src/eapol_auth directory 2009-11-29 20:21:25 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b60d6f61e4 Make HOSTAPD_DUMP_STATE configurable with CONFIG_NO_DUMP_STATE
This removes the hardcoded definition from Makefile and cleans up
source code by moving the mail HOSTAPD_DUMP_STATE blocks into separate
files to avoid conditional compilation within files.
2009-11-29 20:18:47 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
281c950be4 Move EAPOL authenticator state machine into src/eapol_auth
This is now completely independent from hostapd-specific code, so
it can be moved to be under the src tree.
2009-11-29 20:03:28 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2773ca093e Replace eap_type_text() with EAP server methods function
While this may not include knowledge of all EAP methods since this
depends on build configuration, it is better to not have to include
ieee802_1x.h into eapol_sm.c.
2009-11-29 18:57:15 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0c3abf8d22 Add driver wrapper callback for WPS push button pressed
This avoids the need to include ../hostapd/wps_hostapd.h into the
driver wrappers.
2009-11-29 18:18:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b8be7f5c03 driver_prism54: Use hostapd_notif_disassoc() instead of private copy 2009-11-29 18:13:15 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
67470d5112 Remove some unneeded header file inclusions 2009-11-29 18:07:08 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
bcd154c343 Include sta_flags.h explicitly, not via sta_info.h 2009-11-29 18:00:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
90973fb2fd Remove src/common from default header file path
This makes it clearer which files are including header from src/common.
Some of these cases should probably be cleaned up in the future not to
do that.

In addition, src/common/nl80211_copy.h and wireless_copy.h were moved
into src/drivers since they are only used by driver wrappers and do not
need to live in src/common.
2009-11-29 17:51:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6ae9318536 Split scan processing for RSN preauthentication into parts
This avoids passing the raw scan results into the RSN code and by
doing so, removes the only dependency on src/drivers from the
src/rsn_supp code (or from any src subdirectory for that matter).
2009-11-29 17:06:03 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
120158cc8b Move uuid_gen_mac_addr() from uuid.c into src/wps
This removes the only src/crypto dependency from src/utils files.
2009-11-29 13:15:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
197ef6abef nl80211: Remove unneeded header file: ieee802_11_common.h
driver_nl80211.c does not use anything from this header file.
2009-11-29 13:06:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
fc4e2d9501 HT: Remove unneeded struct ht_cap_ie wrapper
It is simpler to just use the HT Capabilities IE payload structure
as-is.
2009-11-29 13:04:21 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3a328c8133 Remove unused/unneeded IEEE 802.11n definitions 2009-11-29 12:43:23 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
be8eb8ab3e Fix AP mode HT Capabilities IE to use A-MPDU Parameters from the driver
Instead of using hardcoded maximum A-MPDU length of 64 kB and no
restrictions on minimum MPDU Start Spacing, use the correct values
reported by the driver.
2009-11-29 12:21:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a49148fd55 Rename HT Capabilities IE fields to match with IEEE Std 802.11n-2009 2009-11-29 12:02:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
15ef92d3cc Complete Doxygen documentation for RADIUS client
No more warnings from Doxygen about missing documentation from
radius_client.[ch].
2009-11-29 11:48:28 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
93704f8f95 Remove unused RADIUS client reconfig function
This is not actually used at all and it looks like the rules for
maintaining the old/new RADIUS configuration are not very clear in the
case the RADIUS client configuration did not change. Consequently, it
is better to just remove this for now and if similar functionality is
ever needed, redesign it to be easier to use without causing hard to
find issues with using freed memory.

Simpler approach to reconfiguring the RADIUS client would involve
just deinitializing the old context unconditionally and initializing
a new one whenever the configuration could have changed.
2009-11-28 23:04:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5843e1c9a6 Move acct_interim_interval away from RADIUS client configuration
This is not used at all inside RADIUS client and as such, it belongs
into hostapd configuration.
2009-11-28 23:03:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
df1e24aceb Improved Doxygen documentation for RADIUS client code 2009-11-28 23:00:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8d5aca73bb Fix doxygen file level comments 2009-11-28 21:34:14 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e8f5625c45 Fix doxygen file level comments 2009-11-28 21:14:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ed45947e9b WPS: Update couple of missed Primary Device Type uses 2009-11-26 11:54:37 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
96750ea5e5 WPS: Clean up Primary Device Type handling
Use shared functions for converting Primary Device Type between binary
and string formats. In addition, use array of eight octets instead of a
specific structure with multiple fields to reduce code complexity.
2009-11-26 11:39:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8e2c104fa1 Resolve some sparse warnings
Mainly, this is including header files to get definitions for functions
which is good to verify that the parameters match. None of these are
issues that would have shown as incorrect behavior of the program.
2009-11-25 00:57:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ec8d20187d Remove obsoleted get_scan_results() driver_ops
This has now been replaced with get_scan_results2() in every
in-tree driver.
2009-11-23 21:33:37 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c2e8d0a092 Remove deprecated scan and set_probe_req_ie driver_ops
These have been replaced with scan2 driver_ops that provides all
parameters in a single call.
2009-11-23 21:13:46 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4a867032ae Remove deprecated driver_ops handlers
This gets rid of previously deprecated driver_ops handlers set_wpa,
set_drop_unencrypted, set_auth_alg, set_mode. The same functionality
can be achieved by using the init/deinit/associate handlers.
2009-11-23 20:22:38 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e90bba4c59 Add cleared deprecation notes on iwl,ndiswrapper,madwifi(sta) wrappers
These driver wrappers should not be used anymore; WEXT should be used
instead. However, there may still be users stuck on older kernel versions
that may require driver specific wrappers, so the source code still
remains in the repository.
2009-11-23 17:08:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
642187d6bf Merge set_key and hapd_set_key driver_ops into a single function 2009-11-23 16:58:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
fd7a5dd15f Move HOSTAPD_MTU definition into driver_hostap.c
This moves the MTU definition into driver_hostap.c since it was really
meant to be specific to this driver. Since this was the last remaining
definition in hostapd_defs.h, remove that header file as unnecessary.
2009-11-23 16:21:07 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0715247aa8 Remove unneeded set-MTU operation from drivers
This code was copied from driver_hostap.c where it is used with the
special wlan#ap interface. It was not supposed to be used to change
the MTU for a normal data interface.
2009-11-23 16:17:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d994a9b54e Move definitions away from hostapd_defs.h
Clean up definitions to reduce need to include header files from the
hostapd directory into files under the src subdirectories.
2009-11-23 16:14:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c1bb3e0a62 nl80211: Build some client functionality unconditionally
Even though this makes the hostapd version a bit larger, the code will
be easier to maintain with the reduced number of complex ifdef blacks.
2009-11-23 15:40:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
dbb2618300 nl80211: Remove last remaining WEXT code
Clean up driver_nl80211.c by gettign rid of the last remaining WEXT use.
This requires that a recent mac80211 version is used to get full protection
in station mode via the authorized flag (IEEE 802.1X PAE).
2009-11-23 15:30:05 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5d67487244 Merge set_beacon driver_ops into a single one
Clean up driver interface by merging hostapd and wpa_supplicant
specific set_beacon driver_ops into a single one. In addition,
merge set_beacon_int into to the same operation.
2009-11-23 15:26:05 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3c2166d63c WPS: Do not try to send byebye advertisements if socket is not valid
If initialization fails, we could potentially try to sendto() on -1
socket which would fail. No point in doing that, so just return early
from the function.
2009-11-21 22:00:33 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3617d81a70 Fix a typo in a comment 2009-11-21 21:13:19 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
55d0b0831e OpenSSL: Remove unneeded MinGW CryptoAPI compat code
The current MinGW/w32api versions seem to provide all the needed CryptoAPI
functions, so the code for loading these dynamically from the DLL can be
removed.
2009-11-21 20:33:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e3992c3381 GnuTLS: Fix compilation with newer GnuTLS versions
Avoid duplicate defination of TLS_RANDOM_SIZE and TLS_MASTER_SIZE.
2009-11-21 20:23:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6d798e8b7e Fix strict aliasing issue with the internal SHA-1 implementation
Need to define the workspace buffer properly to allow compiler to handle
strict aliasing between the incoming unsigned char[64] buffer as an u32
array. The previous version built with strict aliasing enabled can
result in SHA-1 producing incorrect results and consequently, with
4-way handshake failing.

This is based on a report and patch from Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
but with a different type (the union) used as a fix to avoid needing
extra type casting.

Discovered as part of the investigation of:

https://bugzilla.redhat.com/show_bug.cgi?id=494262#c32

if sha1 is built with gcc without turning off strict aliasing, it will
fail to correctly generate the hashes and will fail its own testcases as
well.

Signed-off-by: Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
2009-11-21 20:17:24 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
11ff95783e WPS ER: Deinitialize protocol instance with STA after completion
In addition, remove the WPS ER Enrollee entry 10 seconds after
successful completion of the protocol run.
2009-11-21 18:39:12 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a34a330706 WPS ER: Use random event identifier in event URL
This avoids some issues in cases where the ER has been started and
stopped multiple times on the same address and an AP may have stored
multiple event notification addresses for the same ER. The random
identifier allows the ER to filter out unexpected messages from further
processing.
2009-11-21 18:15:37 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3f6dc111ff WPS: Cleanup subscription URL list handling
Do not give the allocated memory to the subscription code since it was
not using it as-is anyway. This makes it easier to understand who owns
the allocation an is responsible of freeing it. This may potentially
fix some memory leaks on error paths.
2009-11-21 18:06:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ec72bd0c77 WPS ER: Move SSDP functionality into a separate file 2009-11-21 17:26:23 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e694b34474 WPS ER: Add more AP information into the ctrl_interface message
This allow wpa_gui to show AP BSSID, WPS State (configured/unconfigured),
and primary device type.
2009-11-21 13:34:23 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c3016248f4 WPS ER: Fetch AP's M1 to learn device type and WPS state 2009-11-21 13:13:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
52a45d20dd WPS ER: Use (addr,UUID) as the key for AP entries
This allows multiple WPS AP instances to be supported per IP address.
2009-11-21 12:51:40 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7a082a83f0 WPS ER: Stop AP unlink loop on match
There is no need to continue through the list after this, since the
same AP entry can only be listed once.
2009-11-21 12:18:24 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6a1e492a81 WPS ER: Move STA entry unlinking into a separate function 2009-11-21 12:18:03 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7c04d5ec6c WPS ER: Fix AP entry freeing on timeout
Must unlink the entry first before trying to remove it to avoid
leaving behind pointers to freed memory.
2009-11-21 12:12:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b3f371cabf WPS ER: Refresh ER data on WPS_ER_START when already started
This sends out the AP and Enrollee notifications for all tracked
devices and generates a new SSDP search to find more APs.
2009-11-20 21:57:30 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7c009db2a6 WPS ER: Fix Enrollee entry freeing on timeout
Must unlink the entry first before trying to remove it to avoid
leaving behind pointers to freed memory.
2009-11-20 21:56:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a3c6598fcd Add 'none' driver as an option for wpa_supplicant
This can be used, e.g., with WPS ER when no network interface is
actually used for IEEE 802.1X or wireless operations.
2009-11-20 21:12:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4bdd556886 WPS: Fix MAC Address inside Credential be that of Enrollee's
The WPS 1.0h specification is quite unclear on what exactly should be
used as the MAC Address value in the Credential and AP Settings. It
looks like this should after all be the MAC Address of the Enrollee,
so change Registrar implementation to use that address instead of the
AP BSSID.

In addition, add validation code to the Enrollee implementation to
check the MAC Address value inside Credential (and also inside AP Settings)
to make sure it matches with the Enrollee's own address. However, since
there are deployed implementations that do not follow this interpretation
of the spec, only show the mismatch in debug information to avoid breaking
interoperability with existing devices.
2009-11-19 00:31:57 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
62fa124ce2 nl80211/SME: Use reassociation when roaming within the ESS 2009-11-17 19:25:05 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
33417cd75c WPS ER: Clear WPS protocol run on PutMessage failure 2009-11-15 22:56:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2c073ad43d WPS ER: Deinit WPS protocol data when freeing AP entry 2009-11-15 22:53:10 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
cef4652f2c WPS ER: Use learnt AP settings to build credentials for an Enrollee 2009-11-15 22:46:30 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e64dcfd54b WPS ER: Add command for fetching current AP settings 2009-11-15 22:27:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
82b857ec0b WPS: Determine the OpCode based on message type attribute (UPnP)
This allows WSC_ACK and WSC_NACK to be processed correctly in the AP
when operating as an Enrollee with an ER over UPnP transport.
2009-11-15 22:23:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f6d23cfd9e WPS ER: Do not try to process AP Settings in proxied M7 to ER
In this case, the Enrollee is not an AP, so do not try to process
AP Settings in M7.
2009-11-15 18:54:37 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
564cd7fa2c WPS ER: Add preliminary PBC support
This will need some additional code in wps_er_pbc() to handle PBC mode
enabling for a single AP only. For now, this can only be expected to work
when the ER is connected to a single AP.
2009-11-15 18:46:03 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5d34ab644d WPS ER: Only send Enrollee notification on Probe Request and M1
No need to do this for M3..M7 or NACK/ACK/Done messages.
2009-11-15 18:29:19 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b78bc3a37e WPS ER: Add ctrl_iface notifications for AP/Enrollee add/remove 2009-11-15 12:07:27 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
462adee5fe WPS ER: Store AP UUID in binary format for future use 2009-11-15 11:07:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
fcac668faa WPS: Use a dummy WSC_ACK as WLANEvent as the initial event if needed
UPnP device architecture specification requires all evented variables to
be included in the initial event message after subscription. Since this
can happen before we have seen any events, generated a dummy event
(WSC_ACK with all-zeros nonces) if needed.
2009-11-15 01:11:28 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
44577e4c2e WPS: Send SSDP byebye notifications when stopping UPnP advertisements
This will notify control points of the services going away and allows
them to notice this without having to wait timeout on the
initial advertisements.
2009-11-15 00:46:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d806a5588e WPS: Remove derivation of management keys
MgmtAuthKey and MgmtEncKey were not used for anything and are unlikely
to ever be used, so better remove the code to reduce binary size.
2009-11-14 14:18:15 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
00785aba71 WPS: Remove unused WFA WLANConfig Service actions
This removes following WFA WLANConfig Service actions and the related
state variables: GetAPSettings, SetAPSettings, DelAPSettings,
GetSTASettings, SetSTASettings, DelSTASettings, RebootAP,
ResetAP, RebootSTA, ResetSTA.

While WFA WLANConfig Service version 1.0 claims that some of these are
mandatory to implement for an AP, there are no known implementations
supporting these actions neither in an AP/proxy or an External Registrar
that would use them. These are unlikely to be supported in the future
either and as such, it is just simpler to get rid of them to clean up
the implementation and reduce code size.
2009-11-14 14:08:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7ec2e26ddf WPS ER: Fix Op-Code for WSC_{ACK,NACK,Done}
When using UPnP transport, the Op-Code is not included, but the WPS
frame processing will need this. Generate a matching Op-Code based
on the message type.
2009-11-13 22:40:27 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ed835e539b WPS: Fix AP to proxy WSC_NACK to ER 2009-11-13 22:40:07 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
04f5d74077 WPS: Fix OpCode when proxying WSC_ACK or WSC_NACK from ER
Previously, WSC_MSG was hardcoded for every message from ER, but
this needs to be changed based on message type to send a valid
message to the Enrollee via EAP transport.
2009-11-13 22:29:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
72df2f5fc6 WPS ER: Add PIN configuration and SetSelectedRegistrar call
New PINs can now be added to WPS ER. This results in the ER code
using SetSelectedRegistrar to modify AP state so that Enrollees
will be able to notice the actice registrar more easily.
2009-11-13 22:07:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d64d9ddf6c WPS: Fix http_link_update() to nul terminate the result 2009-11-13 22:05:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ecc6d04b89 WPS ER: Add PutWLANResponse generation and transmission
This allows the M2D message to be transmitted as a response to the
Enrollee via the proxying AP.
2009-11-12 01:24:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b345031997 WPS ER: Add STA/Enrollee entries and start processing EAP messages
This keeps STA/Enrollee entries up to date and sets up registration
protocol session. M1 is processed and M2D generated, but the there
is no code yet to transmit the response back to the AP with
PutWLANResponse.
2009-11-11 23:50:17 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
6980c19127 hostapd: fix AP mode initialization for nl80211
Always bring down the wlan interface, even when not changing the
BSSID, the interface also needs to be down for changing its type
from managed to AP mode.
2009-11-11 16:47:01 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
dc6d9ac250 WPS ER: Parse WLANEvent notifications and send HTTP response
The receive Probe Request and EAP-WSC notifications are now parsed
(including the TLVs in them) and contents is shown in the debug log.
Actual processing of the received information is still missing (TODO
comments indicate the needed functionality).
2009-11-11 00:23:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
feae037c25 driver_prism54: Use os_zalloc instead of malloc to clear memory
This will make sure the full buffer is initialized even if some
fields were not explicitly set.
2009-11-10 17:08:33 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6689218ec7 Fix comparison to use correct symbol name (__rand vs. rand)
rand would be the address of rand() function and never NULL. The previous
version could have crashed on invalid AKA-AUTS command. Though, these
commands are only from hostapd which sends valid requests and as such,
the actual issue did not show up.
2009-11-10 16:51:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
69856fadf7 Add wpa_msg_ctrl() for ctrl_interface-only messages
This is like wpa_msg(), but the output is directed only to
ctrl_interface listeners. In other words, the output will not be
shown on stdout or in syslog.

Change scan result reporting to use wpa_msg_ctrl() for
CTRL-EVENT-SCAN-RESULTS message at info level and wpa_printf() at
debug level to avoid showing scan result events in syslog in the
common configuration used with NetworkManager.
2009-11-10 15:59:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
efa6481438 WPS: Fixed printf size_t warning on 32-bit builds 2009-11-10 11:30:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
097c7b3723 WPS ER: Subscribe to UPnP events
This adds code to start a HTTP server and to subscribe to UPnP events
from each discovered WPS AP. The event messages are received, but there
is not yet any code to actually parse the contents of the event.
2009-11-09 20:01:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
875a4e5936 WPS: Read HTTP request within HTTP server code
This removes HTTP related code from wps_upnp_web.c and makes it easier
to use HTTP server functionality for new uses (e.g., WPS ER).
2009-11-08 22:33:34 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b905c4a398 WPS: Add HTTP server module
Clean up code so that UPnP implementation does not need to include all
the HTTP functionality. In addition, make it easier to share HTTP server
functionality with other components in the future.
2009-11-08 17:26:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
585774f28a WPS ER: Fetch and parse device description 2009-11-08 16:46:03 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0b40d03394 WPS: Move generic UPnP XML helper functionality into a separate file 2009-11-08 14:06:01 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
092794f480 WPS: Add HTTP client module to clean up code
Instead of implementing HTTP client functionality inside
wps_upnp_event.c, use a generic HTTP client module to do this. The HTTP
client code can now be shared more easily for other purposes, too.
2009-11-08 12:35:37 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b02ee4a228 WPS: Mark functions static
These functions are used only within wps_upnp_event.c.
2009-11-07 17:04:19 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e9bcfebfce WPS: Add initial part of External Registrar functionality
This is the first step in adding support for using wpa_supplicant as a
WPS External Registrar to manage APs over UPnP. Only the device
discovery part is implemented in this commit.
2009-11-07 12:41:01 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
08eb154db5 Fix MCS set field to be based on driver info
Instead of using hardcoded Rx MCS bitmask (indexes 0..15 enabled),
use the real information from the driver capabilities.
2009-11-05 12:38:47 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5a641ae01e Use type-punning to avoid breaking strict aliasing rules
While the actual use here would be unlikely to be broken by any C
optimization, it is better to use explicit union construction to let
gcc know about the aliasing and avoid warnings from gcc 4.4.
2009-11-05 12:11:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0ae7b08691 Work around some gcc 4.4 strict-aliasing warnings
gcc 4.4 ends up generating strict-aliasing warnings about some very common
networking socket uses that do not really result in a real problem and
cannot be easily avoided with union-based type-punning due to struct
definitions including another struct in system header files. To avoid having
to fully disable strict-aliasing warnings, provide a mechanism to hide the
typecast from aliasing for now. A cleaner solution will hopefully be found
in the future to handle these cases.
2009-11-04 19:49:14 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
eb999fefcb Add Xcode project file for building wpa_supplicant 2009-11-02 19:37:46 +02:00
Andriy Tkachuk
72ffc08242 WPS: SelectedRegistrar expiration for internal PIN registrar
Though we have such a timeout when handling SetSelectedRegistrar UPnP
message from an external registrar, it looks like we don't have one when
the internal registrar is activated for PIN connection. Thus we set the
SelectedRegistrar flag when AP is activated for PIN connection but we
never reset it - not by some timeout, nor when registration succeeds.
This lead to situations where AP everlastingly declare that it is
activated for WPS PIN connection when in reality it is not.

Use the same timeout (and also success with PIN) to clear the selected
registrar flag when using internal registrar, too.
2009-11-01 22:19:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2e71444516 WPS: Abort ongoing PBC protocol run if session overlap is detected
If PBC session overlap is detected during an ongoing PBC protocol run,
reject the run (if M8, i.e., credentials, have not yet been sent). This
provides a bit longer monitoring time at the Registrar for PBC mode to
catch some cases where two Enrollees in PBC mode try to enroll
credentials at about the same time.
2009-11-01 21:59:30 +02:00
Oleg Kravtsov
63330c6832 WPS: Add PBC overlap and timeout events from WPS module
This provides information about PBC mode result from the WPS Registrar
module. This could be used, e.g., to provide a user notification on the
AP UI on PBC failures.
2009-11-01 21:26:13 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7e3a67514f WPS: Use Config Error 12 to indicate PBC overlap in M2D
If PBC session overlap is detected between button press on the registrar
and M1 is reception, report session overlap with the Config Error
attribute in M2D to the Enrollee.
2009-11-01 20:57:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e5fc45d7ae Fix dbus build without EAP 2009-10-22 11:11:53 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
08d38568df Move shared MD5/SHA-1 internal definitions into header files 2009-10-17 12:55:12 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1e8c857abe Move shared DES definitions into a header file 2009-10-17 12:53:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f1739bac4f Move PKCS# {1,5,8} functionality into separate files
This functionality fits better with src/tls (i.e., internal TLS
implementation), so move it there to make crypto_internal.c more
of a wrapper like other crypto_*.c files.
2009-10-17 12:48:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3af9f2983c TLS: Replace set_key helpers to return key instead of status code
The status code was not being used anyway, so it is simpler to
just return the key as is done in crypto functions.
2009-10-17 12:15:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3f4ed97a70 Add support for PKCS #5 encrypted PKCS #8 keys with internal crypto
Private keys can now be used in either unencrypted or encrypted
PKCS #8 encoding. Only the pbeWithMD5AndDES-CBC algorithm (PKCS #5)
is currently supported.
2009-10-17 12:06:36 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
506b45ed22 Add DES-CBC support into internal crypto implementation 2009-10-17 12:05:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8ef74414fc Internal TLS: Add support for unencrypred PKCS#8 private keys in PEM
Recognize the PEM header "BEGIN PRIVATE KEY" as base64-decode the data
to be able to use PEM encoded, unencrypted PKCS#8 private keys with the
internal TLS implementation. Previously, only DER encoding of the
PKCS#8 private key was supported.
2009-10-16 22:00:45 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
43fb529750 Add AP mode WPA status into ctrl_iface 2009-10-16 18:35:45 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
20bd9547a1 Add ctrl_iface events for AP mode STA connect/disconnect
These are used to notify ctrl_iface monitors when a STA completes
connection (the port becomes authorized) and when a STA disconnects.
2009-10-16 17:51:49 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
278da1b52a openssl: Allow build with OpenSSL 0.9.7
OpenSSL 0.9.7 does not include get_rfc3526_prime_1536() function, so
provide that functionality internally if needed. In addition, make
sha256_vector() building depend on whether SHA256 support is included
in the OpenSSL library. This with CONFIG_INTERNAL_SHA256=y in .config
allows OpenSSL without SHA256 support to be used.
2009-10-16 15:57:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d8130bdf13 openssl: Mark openssl_digest_vector() static 2009-10-16 15:54:52 +03:00
Masashi Honma
9b336bcef0 DragonFly BSD: Fix driver_bsd.c build
Both hostapd/wpa_supplicant compilation fails on DragonFly BSD.

This patch solves this issue.

I have tested only compilation. Not functionality.
Because I don't have any device which can work on DragonFly BSD.
2009-10-12 09:56:57 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6d6f4bb87f nl80211: Work around mac80211 limitation on (re)auth when authenticated
mac80211 does not currently allow (re)authentication when we are already
authenticated. In order to work around this, force deauthentication if
nl80211 authentication command fails with EALREADY. Unfortunately, the
workaround code in driver_nl80211.c alone is not enough since the
following disconnection event would clear wpa_supplicant authentication
state. To handle this, add some code to restore authentication state
when using userspace SME.

This workaround will hopefully become unnecessary in some point should
mac80211 start accepting new authentication requests even when in
authenticated state.
2009-10-12 09:39:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
34c9910dc7 Fix EAP-AKA server build without EAP-SIM 2009-10-11 22:23:05 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
38b462868c Clean up crypto makefile segments
Reorganize the TLS/crypto library segments into a single set of blocks
for each library instead of multiple locations handling library-specific
operations. Group crypto functionality together and get wpa_supplicant
and hostapd Makefile closer to eachother in order to make it easier to
eventually move this into a shared makefile.
2009-10-11 22:04:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f042122a57 Allow the internal DH implementation to be overridden
Crypto library wrappers can now override the internal DH (group 5)
implementation. As a starting point, this is done with OpenSSL. The
new mechanism is currently available only for WPS (i.e., IKEv2 still
depends on the internal DH implementation).
2009-10-11 19:17:22 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
dd01b1ff9d Include only the used DH groups in the build
This reduces the binary size by 3 kB or so when WPS is included in
the build, but IKEv2 is not.
2009-10-11 15:24:40 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b3ad11bb80 nl80211: Add parsing of NL80211_BSS_SEEN_MS_AGO into scan results 2009-10-01 17:53:22 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d942a79e6a nl80211: Recognize NL80211_CMD_TRIGGER_SCAN events
Replace "nl80211: Ignored unknown event (cmd=33)" with
"nl80211: Scan trigger" to make debug output clearer. We do not
currently do anything with this event apart from showing it in
the debug log.
2009-10-01 13:58:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ebf214e670 NSS: Implement TLS PRF using new TLS extractor interface
This allows NSS to be used to derive EAP-TLS/PEAP/TTLS keying material.
NSS requires a patch from
https://bugzilla.mozilla.org/show_bug.cgi?id=507359
to provide the new API. In addition, that patch needs to be modified to
add the 16-bit context length value in SSL_ExportKeyingMaterial() only if
contextlen != 0 in order to match with the EAP-TLS/PEAP/TTLS use cases.
This issue seems to be coming from the unfortunate incompatibility in
draft-ietf-tls-extractor-07.txt (draft-ietf-tls-extractor-00.txt would
have used compatible PRF construction).

At this point, it is unclear how this will be resolved eventually, but
anyway, this shows a mechanism that can be used to implement EAP key
derivation with NSS with a small patch to NSS.
2009-09-30 20:12:32 +03:00
Author: Johannes Berg
1c766b094a nl80211: Fix a typo in set_sta_vlan()
The VLAN interface index needs to use NL80211_ATTR_STA_VLAN. It was
adding a duplicate NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX.
2009-09-30 19:23:52 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
289ffc2b61 Add preliminary version of NSS TLS/crypto wrapper for wpa_supplicant
This brings in the first step in adding support for using NSS
(Mozilla Network Security Services) as the crypto and TLS library
with wpa_supplicant. This version is able to run through EAP-PEAP
and EAP-TTLS authentication, but does not yet implement any
certificate/private key configuration. In addition, this does not
implement proper key fetching functions either, so the end result
is not really of much use in real world yet.
2009-09-29 01:21:09 +03:00
Masashi Honma
f335c69e14 DragonFly BSD: Fix wired IEEE 802.1X
On DragonFly BSD, wired IEEE 802.1X fails with this message:
ioctl[SIOC{ADD/DEL}MULTI]: Invalid argument

This patch solves this issue.

I have tested with these:
OS : DragonFly BSD 2.4.0
EAP : EAP-TLS
Switch : Cisco Catalyst 2950
2009-09-28 16:10:02 +03:00
Masashi Honma
40e107c129 Mac OS X: Fix wired IEEE 802.1X 2009-09-26 19:29:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2aa5f84709 nl80211: Use defines for NL80211_KEY_CIPHER values 2009-09-15 11:23:48 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d723bab4b3 Revert "nl80211: Share the same routine for NL80211_ATTR_KEY_CIPHER setup"
This reverts commit 5aa9cb5cca.

The nested key attribute is using different attribute values
(NL80211_KEY_* vs. NL80211_ATTR_KEY_*), so cannot share the same routine
for these purposes..
2009-09-15 11:21:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5aa9cb5cca nl80211: Share the same routine for NL80211_ATTR_KEY_CIPHER setup 2009-09-15 10:54:41 +03:00
Johannes Berg
0194fedb46 driver_nl80211: Fix MLME key settings for static WEP
Current wpa_supplicant has a bug with WEP keys, it adds a zero-length
sequence counter field to netlink which the kernel doesn't accept.

Additionally, the kernel API slightly changed to accept keys only when
connected, so we need to send it the keys after that. For that to work
with shared key authentication, we also include the default WEP TX key
in the authentication command.

To upload the keys properly _after_ associating, add a new flag
WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_SET_KEYS_AFTER_ASSOC_DONE indicating that the driver
needs the keys at that point and not earlier.
2009-09-15 10:48:30 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
611ed49118 Add parsed information from WPS IE(s) into scan results
This makes it easier for external programs to show WPS information
since they do not need to parse the WPS IE themselves anymore.
2009-09-11 17:14:49 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e9a2bca6f5 WPS: Add parsing of AP Setup Locked attribute 2009-09-11 17:13:59 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6e4f461270 Fix driver_test for hostapd
Commit 0b55b934ee broke this by not
initializing drv->ap = 1 in hostapd case since the mode updating
code ended up unlinking the socket file. Setting drv->ap = 1
removes the mode change and as such, unlinking of the socket file.
2009-09-11 16:45:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
abad3ccb1e Convert WPS IE concat routine to a generic helper
This may also be needed in wpa_supplicant and potentially for other
IE types, too.
2009-09-11 16:36:59 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
630a843f59 driver_test: Update BSS data when using wpa_supplicant AP mode 2009-09-11 00:22:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0b55b934ee driver_test: Implement set_mode for wpa_supplicant AP deinit 2009-09-11 00:17:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
86e9f093a0 driver_test: Preliminary support for wpa_supplicant AP functionality 2009-09-10 17:41:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5d5b99ecd3 driver_test: Share the same deinit() for hostapd and wpa_supplicant 2009-09-10 17:03:51 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c6f726748d driver_test: Merge socket_dir into test_dir 2009-09-10 16:52:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5ae8964079 driver_test: Some additional merging of send_mlme 2009-09-10 16:48:10 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
133032e7bd driver_test: Claim AP mode capability for wpa_supplicant 2009-09-10 16:30:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ac48db0f2b driver_test: Build most of code in unconditionally
It is simpler to just build in all the test driver code regardless
of whether this is for hostapd or wpa_supplicant (which will eventually
get AP mode support with driver_test, too).
2009-09-10 16:28:47 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
41aeddf99a driver_test: Merge wpa_supplicant and hostapd data structures
There is no real need to keep these in separate data structures with
different names.
2009-09-10 16:18:04 +03:00
Alex Badea
7598210b79 radius_server: clean up completed sessions sooner
radius_server_encapsulate_eap() resets sess->eap->if->eap{Success,Fail}
to FALSE, such that the completion condition is never true.

The net effect is that completed sessions would linger for
RADIUS_SESSION_TIMEOUT seconds.

Signed-off-by: Alex Badea <vamposdecampos@gmail.com>

Previously, the default settings allowed 100 sessions in 60 seconds.
With this fix, the default limit is now 100 sessions per 10 seconds.
[Bug 329]
2009-09-09 23:54:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2678509dec WPS: Store device info and make it available through AP ctrl_iface
Store a copy of device attributes during WPS protocol run and make it
available for external programs via the control interface STA MIB
command for associated stations. This gives access to device name and
type which can be useful when showing user information about associated
stations.
2009-09-07 22:09:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
52eb293dd2 WPS: Add support for AP reconfiguration with wps_reg
wpa_supplicant can now reconfigure the AP by acting as an External
Registrar with the wps_reg command. Previously, this was only used
to fetch the current AP settings, but now the wps_reg command has
optional arguments which can be used to provide the new AP
configuration. When the new parameters are set, the WPS protocol run
is allowed to continue through M8 to reconfigure the AP instead of
stopping at M7.
2009-09-06 13:58:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7da2c5276d nl80211: Ignore connect/roam/disconnect events when using SME
Getting double association/disassociation events can get core code
confused, so better filter out the extra events.
2009-09-04 16:39:41 +03:00
Zhu Yi
cfaab58007 nl80211: Connect API support
If the driver does not support separate authentication and association
steps, use the connect API instead.
2009-09-03 21:31:29 +03:00
Zhu Yi
da72a1c1ae nl80211: Add connect/disconnect event processing 2009-09-03 20:39:59 +03:00
Zhu Yi
93d1140077 nl80211: Check whether the driver support separate auth/assoc commands
This is an initial step in adding support for the new connect command.
For now, we just add the capability query. The actual use of the new
command will be added separately.
2009-09-03 20:36:09 +03:00
Zhu Yi
8d6ca17813 nl80211: Use defines for cipher suite selectors 2009-09-03 20:21:18 +03:00
Masashi Honma
80cc6bf6d0 OpenBSD: wired IEEE 802.1X for OpenBSD
This is a patch for OpenBSD wired IEEE 802.1X. This is only for wired,
not wireless, because OpenBSD uses wpa_supplicant only on wired now.

http://www.openbsd.org/cgi-bin/cvsweb/ports/security/wpa_supplicant/

I have tested with these.
OS : OpenBSD 4.5
EAP : EAP-TLS
Switch : CentreCOM 8724SL
2009-08-26 23:40:51 +03:00
Masashi Honma
fe23eb5696 WPS: Aggregate deinit calls in WPS OOB
In WPS OOB, deinit_func() is called from 3 locations.
This patch aggregates these to one.
2009-08-26 23:34:54 +03:00
Witold Sowa
3a57305f10 Fix a bug with ap_rx_from_unknown_sta() recursion
ap_rx_from_unknown_sta was going into infinite recursion,
or could even crash because of corrupted pointer cast.
2009-08-26 20:18:24 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
335ce76b1c nl80211: Use two sockets to avoid mixing command replies with events
Previously, both the command replies and unsolicited events were
received from the same socket. This could cause problems if an event
message is received between a command and the response to that command.
Using two sockets avoids this issue.
2009-08-26 12:10:50 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5cd89c26f9 Disable PMTU discovery for RADIUS packets (sent them without DF)
When Linux has Path MTU discovery enabled, it sets by default the DF bit
on all outgoing datagrams, also UDP ones. If a RADIUS message is bigger
than the smallest MTU size to the target, it will be discarded.

This effectively limits RADIUS messages to ~ 1500 Bytes, while they can
be up to 4k according to RFC2865. In practice, this can mean trouble
when doing EAP-TLS with many RADIUS attributes besides the EAP-Message.
[Bug 326]
2009-08-23 21:32:27 +03:00
Stefan Winter
a2fbf12524 Disable PMTU discovery for RADIUS packets (sent them without DF)
When Linux has Path MTU discovery enabled, it sets by default the DF bit
on all outgoing datagrams, also UDP ones. If a RADIUS message is bigger
than the smallest MTU size to the target, it will be discarded.

This effectively limits RADIUS messages to ~ 1500 Bytes, while they can
be up to 4k according to RFC2865. In practice, this can mean trouble
when doing EAP-TLS with many RADIUS attributes besides the EAP-Message.
[Bug 326]
2009-08-23 21:21:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ad469aecc1 Reject X.509 certificate strings with embedded NUL characters
These could, at least in theory, be used to generate unexpected common
name or subject alternative name matches should a CA sign strings with
NUL (C string termination) in them. For now, just reject the certificate
if an embedded NUL is detected. In theory, all the comparison routines
could be made to compare these strings as binary blobs (with additional
X.509 rules to handle some exceptions) and display NUL characters
somehow. Anyway, just rejecting the certificate will get rid of
potential problems with the C string getting terminated and it should
not really be used in certificates, so this should not break valid use
cases.
2009-08-23 21:00:38 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9932c17fc8 Sync with linux/nl80211.h from wireless-testing.git 2009-08-18 11:33:40 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1ba787b954 Remove unneeded aes_i.h inclusion from number of places
The BLOCK_SIZE define can be made more specific by using AES_ prefix and
by moving it to aes.h. After this, most aes-*.c do not really need to
include anything from the internal aes_i.h header file. In other words,
aes_i.h can now be used only for the code that uses the internal AES
block operation implementation and none of the code that can use AES
implementation from an external library do not need to include this
header file.
2009-08-17 20:27:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
04b6b3ed51 Verify that EAPOL-Key MIC generation succeeds
This can now fail, e.g., if trying to use TKIP in FIPS mode.
2009-08-16 22:35:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7a215dfc2b Verify that RC4 operation succeeds 2009-08-16 22:28:40 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
108f9dd49b Fix crypto_cipher_init() EVP initialization
Better not specify EVP_CIPHER again for the second init call since that
will override key length with the default value. The previous version
was likely to work since most use cases would be likely to use the
default key length. Anyway, better make this handle variable length
ciphers (mainly, RC4), too, just in case it is needed in the future.
2009-08-16 22:26:59 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7cba52d852 Use OpenSSL for RC4 instead of internal implementation 2009-08-16 22:26:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ac73690c06 Move RC4 into crypto.h as a replaceable crypto function
This allows crypto library wrappers to override the internal RC4
implementation in the same way as can already be done for other crypto
algorithms.
2009-08-16 20:13:14 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8ef1683115 Remove rc4() wrapper
This is not really of that much use since rc4_skip() can be used as
easily. In addition, rc4 has caused some symbol conflicts in the past,
so it is easier to live without that as an exported symbol.
2009-08-16 19:57:50 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1d5ed36e7c Fix build with non-FIPS capable OpenSSL 2009-08-16 19:56:33 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c5f6ad5766 Verify CHAP/MSCHAPv2 return code
Check the return code in some (but not yet all) places where the
functions from ms_funcs.c are used.
2009-08-16 19:07:57 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ff916b9df7 Allow non-FIPS MD5 to be used with TLS PRF even in FIPS mode
This is allowed per FIPS1402IG.pdf since the TLS PRF depends fully on
both MD5 and SHA-1.
2009-08-16 18:56:48 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
be299ca4ce Pass digest return value to CHAP/MSCHAPv2 caller 2009-08-16 18:38:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
76f04b38b0 Preliminary support for FIPS mode operation with OpenSSL
wpa_supplicant can now be built with FIPS capable OpenSSL for FIPS mode
operation. Currently, this is only enabling the FIPS mode in OpenSSL
without providing any higher level enforcement in wpa_supplicant.
Consequently, invalid configuration will fail during the authentication
run. Proper configuration (e.g., WPA2-Enterprise with EAP-TLS) allows
the connection to be completed.
2009-08-16 14:24:22 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6d503f67e3 Pass error values from digest calls to ms_funcs callers
These function calls can now fail, so better let the caller know if that
happened.
2009-08-16 14:18:59 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1430ba9b7e OpenSSL: Use library version of SHA256
There is no need to use the internal SHA256 implementation when using
OpenSSL.
2009-08-16 14:15:36 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4b77bf2a40 OpenSSL: Use EVP_Digest*() functions
Instead of using low level, digest-specific functions, use the generic
EVP interface for digest functions. In addition, report OpenSSL errors
in more detail.
2009-08-16 14:12:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0a5d68aba5 Make hash functions return error value
Some crypto libraries can return in these functions (e.g., if a specific
hash function is disabled), so we better provide the caller a chance to
check whether the call failed. The return values are not yet used
anywhere, but they will be needed for future changes.
2009-08-16 14:06:00 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e1ffdfc18b Enable SHA256 digest support in OpenSSL
This is needed to allow X.509 certificates with SHA256 digest to be
used. [Bug 323]
2009-08-16 10:25:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1b8409a0a5 Support PEM format RSA private key with internal TLS implementation 2009-08-16 09:34:21 +03:00
Masashi Honma
d43430d43d NetBSD: Fix wired IEEE 802.1X problem
On NetBSD 5.0, when I use wired 802.1X, "Invalid argument" occurs
on SIOCADDMULTI ioctl and 802.1X fails.

I tried FreeBSD code, but "Address family not supported by protocol family"
occurs on SIOCADDMULTI ioctl and 802.1X fails, too.

This patch solves this issue.

I have tested with these:
OS : NetBSD 5.0
EAP : EAP-MD5
Switch : CentreCOM 8724SL
2009-08-15 20:59:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ba30964b60 Force rebuilding of src/drivers between hostapd and wpa_supplicant
This is a (hopefully) temporary workaround to allow the same source code
tree to be used for building hostapd and wpa_supplicant without having
to manually force recompilation of some files. Currently, some of the
driver wrapper files need to be built separately for hostapd and
wpa_supplicant (#ifdef's in the files based on AP functionality).

This is somewhat racy as far as parallel make execution is concerned,
i.e., it may be necessary to run "make -j#" twice (plain "make" works
fine. Since this is supposed to be a temporary workaround, there is not
much point in trying to fix this with any more complex make processing.
2009-08-14 20:40:37 +03:00
Johannes Berg
e7cd16cac5 Create a common drivers makefile snippet
Instead of having all driver stuff collected across wpa_supplicant
and hostapd, create a common snippet that they both include and
that handles the build configuration.
2009-08-14 19:53:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6b23b70445 Avoid a theoretical integer overflow in base64_encode()
If base64_encode() were to be used with a huge data array, the
previous version could have resulted in overwriting the allocated
buffer due to an integer overflow as pointed out in
http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/query-pr.cgi?pr=137484. However, there
are no know use cases in hostapd or wpa_supplicant that would do that.
Anyway, the recommended change looks reasonable and provides additional
protection should the base64_encode() function be used for something
else in the future.
2009-08-13 16:36:41 +03:00
Johannes Berg
4c9e03e0b2 Crypto build cleanup: remove CONFIG_NO_AES_*
Instead of using a defines and conditional building of AES parts,
move the conditional functionality into separate files.
2009-08-13 11:40:28 +03:00
Johannes Berg
6b5c4c3359 Remove some more crypto ifdef, fix a few small bugs 2009-08-13 11:28:03 +03:00
Johannes Berg
27da6d4a0e Crypto build cleanup: remove CONFIG_NO_AES_ENCRYPT
Instead of using a define and conditional building of AES parts,
move the AES encryption routines into a separate file.
2009-08-13 11:21:32 +03:00
Johannes Berg
381fcbc9f4 Crypto build cleanup: remove CONFIG_NO_AES_DECRYPT
Instead of using a define and conditional building of AES parts,
move the AES decryption routines into a separate file.
2009-08-13 11:16:21 +03:00
Johannes Berg
18abe7acb0 Crypto build cleanup: remove CONFIG_NO_PBKDF2
Instead of using a define and conditional building of sha1.c parts,
move the PBKDF2 implementation into a separate file.
2009-08-11 20:31:39 +03:00
Johannes Berg
d9feab18fc Crypto build cleanup: remove CONFIG_NO_TLS_PRF
Instead of using a define and conditional building of sha1.c parts,
move the TLS PRF implementation into a separate file.
2009-08-11 20:24:06 +03:00
Johannes Berg
6f693b5d0b Crypto build cleanup: remove CONFIG_NO_T_PRF
Instead of using a define and conditional building of sha1.c parts,
move the T-PRF implementation into a separate file.
2009-08-11 20:19:37 +03:00
Johannes Berg
05edfe2994 Crypto build cleanup: remove NEED_FIPS186_2_PRF
Instead of using a define and conditional building of crypto wrapper
parts, move the FIPS 186-2 PRF implementation into separate files.
2009-08-11 20:06:23 +03:00
Johannes Berg
ad01a5315e Crypto build cleanup: remove INTERNAL_MD5
Instead of using a define and conditional building of md5.c parts,
move the internal-MD5 into a separate file.
2009-07-28 21:36:13 +03:00
Johannes Berg
bd4e28950d Crypto build cleanup: remove INTERNAL_MD4
In addition, rename md4.c to md4-internal.c to match in style with
SHA-1 conditionally built internal implementation.
2009-07-28 21:27:02 +03:00
Johannes Berg
598a792d8c Crypto build cleanup: remove INTERNAL_SHA256
Instead of using a define and conditional building of sha256.c parts,
move the internal-SHA256 into a separate file.
2009-07-28 21:20:04 +03:00
Johannes Berg
246157cba6 Crypto build cleanup: remove INTERNAL_AES
In addition, rename aes.c to aes-internal.c to match in style with
SHA-1 conditionally built internal implementation.
2009-07-28 21:09:57 +03:00
Johannes Berg
657f038102 Crypto build cleanup: remove INTERNAL_DES
In addition, rename des.c to des-internal.c to match in style with
SHA-1 conditionally built internal implementation.
2009-07-28 21:00:44 +03:00
Johannes Berg
928a50a355 Crypto build cleanup: remove INTERNAL_SHA1
Instead of using a define and conditional building of sha1.c parts,
move the internal-SHA-1 into a separate file.
2009-07-28 20:47:04 +03:00
Johannes Berg
849ef835a7 nl80211: Fix WEP key configuration
Current wpa_supplicant has a bug with WEP keys, it adds a zero-length
sequence counter field to netlink which the kernel doesn't accept.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
2009-07-26 21:22:55 +03:00
Johannes Berg
7a47d567cf hostapd: fix auth encryption
hostapd currently tries to encrypt all auth frames,
except for "OPEN" and "SHARED with transaction 3".
This means that it will send an encrypted "unknown
auth algorithm" reply for all other algorithsm. Fix
this by changing the logic to only encrypt shared
key auth frames with transaction 3.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
2009-07-26 21:15:47 +03:00
Jon Loeliger
2e8eac2d67 Allow wpa_supplicant to use libnl-2.0
Change existing CONFIG_LIBNL20 compatibility code in
driver_nl80211.c to be used by both wpa_supplicant
and hostapd, but take care of nl_handle too now.

Propagate CONFIG_LIBNL20 out of .config file and onto
CFLAGS in the Makefile.

Use libnl-gen now too.

Signed-off-by: Jon Loeliger <jdl@bigfootnetworks.com>
---
2009-07-25 17:21:52 +03:00
Ryuji
1c5a1aa51c Fix EAP-TNC peer memory leak on an error path 2009-06-30 19:39:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
064bb8232c Add root .gitignore file to cleanup ignore lists
This removes need for local configuration to ignore *.o and *~
and allows the src/*/.gitignore files to be removed (subdirectories
will inherit the rules from the root .gitignore).
2009-06-29 21:47:19 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f141be0caf EAP-SIM peer: Remove AT_NOTIFICATION from Notification response
This attribute is not supposed to be used in the response frame (i.e.,
it is only in the EAP-Request/SIM-Notification frame) per RFC 4186
chapters 10.1 and 9.9. This is a minor bug since the server is required
to ignore the contents of the EAP-Response/SIM-Notification during
protected result indication per chapter 6.2.

EAP-AKA peer was already following the similar specification in RFC 4187,
but this was somehow missed in the EAP-SIM peer implementation.
2009-06-29 21:42:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2b16c01c4e Rename variable to avoid gcc warning about shadowed names 2009-06-29 21:26:48 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3fed6f2504 Replace hostapd_wps_probe_req_rx() with more generic ProbeReq notifier
The driver wrappers should not need to include wps_hostapd.h, so let's
make this easier by introducing a driver callback for reporting Probe
Request frames.
2009-06-12 17:31:43 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
efe22727da X.509: Add parsing of alternative name to internal TLS implementation
The alternative name extensions are now parsed, but the actual values
are not yet used for alt. subject name matching.
2009-06-11 23:47:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4625a47f4b WPS: Change wpa_supplicant wps_reg to not send out M8
Since we do not currently support changing the AP settings received
from M7, there is no point in actually sending out the M8 that would
likely trigger the AP to reconfigure itself and potentially reboot.
For now, we just receive the AP settings in M7 and add a local network
configuration block based on those, but NACK the message. This makes
wps_reg work like wps_pin, but by using the AP PIN instead of a client
PIN.
2009-06-10 15:53:35 +03:00
Roy Marples
a5b73cc49d driver_bsd.c: Use new MLME method of association.
Old way does not work with all drivers on NetBSD and FreeBSD are
also using this so should be a safe change. [Bug 312]

Signed-off-by: Roy Marples <roy@marples.name>
2009-05-29 22:41:43 +03:00
Roy Marples
66d4085f0a driver_bsd.c: Reduce code duplication between hostapd and wpa_supplicant
Add generic functions to get/set 80211 vars, set 80211 params and
get/sid ssid.
Change NetBSD defines to match the ioctl used for portability.
Check size we're copying into instead of assuming IFNAMSIZ.

Signed-off-by: Roy Marples <roy@marples.name>
2009-05-29 22:38:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
92e63aafdc bsd: Get rid of printf size_t warnings with 64-bit builds 2009-05-29 22:34:07 +03:00
Karl Hiramoto
a35187e71a hostapd: nl80211 retry creating a interface if it fails the first time
If hostapd segfaults, or is killed with -9, or the interface already exists,
when the interface is created, it will fail.

Configuration file: /tmp/hostapd/hostapd.conf
Failed to create interface mon.wlan0_0.
Using interface wlan0_0 with hwaddr 00:13:01:01:08:0a and ssid 'IG_0405_LAN'
Failed to set beacon head/tail or DTIM period
Failed to create interface wlan0_1.

Try to remove the interface and re-create it before aborting.
2009-05-29 21:48:19 +03:00
Dan Williams
2976121955 wext: disconnect at init and deinit
To ensure the supplicant starts and ends with a clean slate (keys are
already cleaned up at init and deinit time), force a null BSSID and
bogus SSID to ensure the driver isn't connected to anything.

Signed-off-by: Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
2009-05-27 21:01:26 +03:00
Dan Williams
87d01acfeb wext: Fix deauthentication to do IW_MLME_DEAUTH prior to disconnect
4853d5ac84 had a small bug in the order
of these function calls in _wext_deauthenticate() (_disassociate()
did have the correct order). The deauthentication frame is supposed
to go out (if driver supports that) before we disconnect more
forcefully.
2009-05-27 20:57:29 +03:00
Dan Williams
64a04447c3 wext: don't force-disconnect in ad-hoc mode
Otherwise the driver might interpret the request as a request to
create/join a new adhoc network with the bogus SSID.

Signed-off-by: Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
2009-05-27 20:55:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
077a781f7a WPS: Add support for setting timeout for PIN
hostapd_cli wps_pin command can now have an optional timeout
parameter that sets the PIN lifetime in seconds. This can be used
to reduce the likelihood of someone else using the PIN should an
active PIN be left in the Registrar.
2009-05-26 17:44:44 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b63303b864 hostapd: Fix internal crypto build without TLS 2009-05-26 17:09:04 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c7be4c2e3e Resolve couple of compiler warnings 2009-05-26 17:08:16 +03:00
Masashi Honma
a65f4a57fd driver_bsd.c: use get_scan_results2
The attached patch will replace get_scan_results with get_scan_results2.
This is a preparation for WPS on BSD.
And I erased "wpa_scan_result_compar". Because scan result
sorting will be done with "wpa_scan_result_compar" on
"scan_helpers.c".

I have done below tests on NetBSD with an atheros card.
- WPA2-PSK(CCMP)
- WPA-PSK(TKIP)
- PEAP(MSCHAPv2)
- EAP-TLS
- EAP-TTLS(MSCHAPv2)
2009-05-21 11:34:54 +03:00
Masashi Honma
131289d88d Fix hostapd and wpa_supplicant comipilation on NetBSD 4.0.1 2009-05-21 11:21:09 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0165255010 nl80211: Add support for IEEE 802.1X port control in station mode
This adds a cleaner mechanism for protecting against unauthorized
data frames than the previously used drop_unencrypted mechanism
(which is not even available with nl80211 and had to use a WEXT
ioctl.

The old drop_unencrypted code is left in for now as the final
surviving WEXT use in driver_nl80211.c. However, it can be removed
from the build by defining NO_WEXT. It may also be removed
eventually when most users are expected to be using recent enough
kernel version.
2009-05-14 21:54:47 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7e76ee9c45 nl80211: Add support for NL80211_ATTR_STA_FLAGS2
For now, the old code using NL80211_ATTR_STA_FLAGS is left in for
backwards compatibility with older kernel versions. It may be removed
eventually when most users are expected to be running with new
enough kernel version.
2009-05-14 21:53:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a652fc1a24 Sync with linux/nl80211.h from wireless-testing.git 2009-05-14 21:51:59 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e572fa331c nl80211: Add MFP flag configuration for station mode
This fixes IEEE 802.11w use with driver_nl80211.c in station mode.
2009-05-12 11:55:18 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c4e281fd91 Drop unprotected Robust Action frames from MFP STAs
These frames are delivered through mac80211 monitor interface, so we
need to filter them out in hostapd.
2009-05-08 12:51:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4209a95df5 Update SA Query transaction id length based on IEEE 802.11w/D8.0
IEEE 802.11w/D8.0 changed the length of the SA Query transaction
identifier from 16 to 2 octets.
2009-05-06 18:57:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
826fff182f WPS: Add a workaround for auth/encr type flags mismatches
Some deployed implementations seem to advertise incorrect information
in this attribute. For example, Linksys WRT350N seems to have a
byteorder bug that breaks this negotiation. In order to interoperate
with existing implementations, assume that the Enrollee supports
everything we do.
2009-05-06 10:56:18 +03:00
Jouke Witteveen
077ed46d2b General revision of RoboSwitch driver
Attached is a patch for the RoboSwitch driver in trunk. It is a
general revision of the source code.

Changes:
- Improved IEEE 802.1X conformance ([1])
- Better conformity to Broadcom specifications
- Fixed compatibility with different chipset revisions

It is worth noting that performance may drop a little using the new
driver. This can be overcome by using "multicast_only=1" as a
parameter. In that case only packets to the PAE group address are
regarded, as the previous revision of the driver did. A more detailed
description of the parameter and it's consequences is available at [2]
(summary: use "multicast_only=1" whenever possible).

[1] http://lists.shmoo.com/pipermail/hostap/2009-February/019398.html
[2] http://forum.openwrt.org/viewtopic.php?id=19873
2009-04-26 21:25:48 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
da1fb17ca7 Add handling of SME auth/assoc timeout events
This allows wpa_supplicant to start searching for other APs (or re-try)
if the MLME times out.
2009-04-24 00:08:24 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1fb1a6f0bf Remove unused set_broadcast_ssid() driver op
None of the driver wrappers user this. hostapd-controlled broadcast SSID
hiding can only be used with drivers that use hostapd for handling
Beacon and Probe Request/Response frames.
2009-04-22 16:15:24 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9351257cfb Remove the unused set_ieee80211d driver op
None of the driver wrappers use this. Only the drivers that use hostapd
for Beacon and Probe Request/Response handling can now use IEEE 802.11d
properly.
2009-04-22 16:11:22 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4bc181ecc7 Add new wpa_supplicant driver op for setting 802.1X port status
This can be used with drivers that implement PAE to control whether
normal data frames (non-EAPOL) are allowed.
2009-04-22 16:01:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ad6494515e nl80211: Replace WEXT code for RTS/fragmentation threshold
nl80211 has new attributes for setting RTS and fragmentation threshold
values. Use these instead of the old WEXT ioctls.
2009-04-21 18:11:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
30985b8600 Remove unused set_retry() driver op 2009-04-21 18:01:43 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5645fbdc85 nl80211: Sync with linux/nl80211.h from wireless-testing.git
Note: This changes values for existing NL80211_ATTR_MAX_SCAN_IE_LEN
and NL80211_ATTR_KEY_TYPE (for some reason, they ended up getting
swapped in wireless-testing.git) and as such, could break Michael
MIC  error reporting (well, at least partially).
2009-04-21 17:54:50 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3ec97afe57 wpa_supplicant AP: Add preliminary support for WPS Internal Registrar
When in AP mode, wpa_supplicant is now enabling WPS (only Internal
Registrar). wpa_cli wps_pbc and wps_pin commands can be used to initiate
WPS negotiation similarly to how this is done in station mode (though,
the BSSID parameter is ignored).
2009-04-21 16:45:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a8d6ffa48f wpa_supplicant AP: Add sta_set_flags 2009-04-20 16:33:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
db149ac949 wpa_supplicant AP: Add EAPOL frame TX and RX
This allows WPA-Personal 4-way handshake to be completed successfully.
2009-04-20 16:27:45 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
13405f3542 nl80211: Mark state disassociated on local deauth/disassoc 2009-04-20 11:37:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
83935317a7 Disconnect if 4-way handshake processing fails
There is no point in trying to continue if a 4-way handshake frame is
discarded or if PTK/GTK/IGTK configuration fails. Force the client to
disconnect in such a case to avoid confusing user by claiming the
connection was successfully completed.
2009-04-20 11:35:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0f4e8b4f65 wpa_supplicant AP: add sta_add() and sta_remove() 2009-04-17 20:09:20 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
460456f832 nl80211: Add/remove monitor interface dynamically based on mode 2009-04-17 16:27:38 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8a27af5c70 nl80211: Delete Beacon information on deinit in wpa_supplicant AP mode 2009-04-17 16:06:12 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b08d177aad Use C99 designated initializers to cleanup driver_ops setup
These driver wrappers use UNIX domain sockets and as such, won't be
built with Microsoft compiler. Consequently, use of C99-style designated
initializers can be used to make these files easier to maintain. Only
driver_ndis.c needs to support the old C89-style due to Microsoft
compiler not supporting newer C standard.
2009-04-17 15:58:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
61693eaa80 hostapd: Remove unused passive scan functionality
This was not really supported by any of the included driver wrappers. If
this functionality is desired in the future, this (or something similar)
can be added with the changes needed into a driver wrapper to use the
mechanism.
2009-04-17 15:47:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c811d5bc78 nl80211: Use ifndef hostapd to reduce binary size
Number of areas are not used by hostapd, so remove them from the build.
2009-04-17 15:36:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6d550fbeea nl80211: Fix secondary BSS ifindex
This was broken by a cleanup patch that moved from ifname to ifindex.
2009-04-17 13:33:30 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4b9841d34c Move more multi-BSSID processing into drv_callbacks.c
This simplifies driver wrapper operations and removes last direct
struct hostapd_data dereferences from driver_nl80211.c. In addition,
some of the TX callbacks are now fixed for secondary BSSes.
2009-04-17 13:29:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
412036f5f0 Provide own_addr buffer in hapd_init() parameters
This reduces number of places in driver wrapper that would need to
dereference struct hostapd_data pointer directly.
2009-04-17 11:55:51 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
731723a5bd Add own_addr as a parameter to sta_deauth() and sta_disassoc()
This fixes deauth/disassoc frames in secondary BSSes when using
multi-BSSID. In addition, it reduces need to dereference
struct hostapd_data inside driver wrappers.
2009-04-17 11:37:22 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7af376e456 nl80211: Fix wpa_supplicant build 2009-04-17 11:23:24 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
41d931ee37 nl80211: Add helper functions for SIOC{G,S}IFHWADDR 2009-04-17 11:22:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b8c4d6df5f Remove dead code related to WDS setup
hostapd does not have any code that would actually call this, so there
is no current need to try to figure out how to set up WDS links with
nl80211.
2009-04-16 19:08:58 +03:00